Datalogic Gryphon I GBT4400 Product Reference Manual

Add to My manuals
332 Pages

advertisement

Datalogic Gryphon I GBT4400 Product Reference Manual | Manualzz

Gryphon™ 2D Family

General Purpose Handheld

Area Imager Bar Code Reader

Gryphon I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Product Reference Guide

Datalogic Scanning, Inc.

959 Terry Street

Eugene, Oregon 97402

USA

Telephone: (541) 683-5700

Fax: (541) 345-7140

An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Datalogic Scanning, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or “Datalogic Scanning”). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.

Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.scanning.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page.

Disclaimer

Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.

Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the

U.S.A and the E.U. All other brand and product names referred to herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Microsoft Windows®, Windows® XP and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Patents

This product is covered by one or more of the following patents:

Design Patents: CN ZL200830142386.5; CN ZL200930006852.1; CN ZL201030175545.9 ; EP870787; EP1177943;

USD599799; USD606076.

Utility Patents: EP996284; EP999514; EP1128315; EP1172756; EP1396811; EP1413971; JP4435343; US5311000;

US5330370; US5481098; US6478224; US6512218; US6513714; US6561427; US6758403; US6808114; US6877664;

US6997385; US7053954; US7234641; US7387246.

Additional patents pending.

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................................................ 9

About this Manual .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9

Manual Conventions ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................10

References ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10

Technical Support ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10

Datalogic Website Support ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................10

Reseller Technical Support ................................................................................................................................................................................................................10

Telephone Technical Support ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................10

About the Reader ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11

The BC40xx™ Radio Base ............................................................................................................................................................................. 12

Base LEDs .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................12

Base Button .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................12

BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection .............................................................................................................................................................. 13

Battery Safety ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 14

Programming the Reader ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16

Configuration Methods ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................16

SETUP .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 17

Unpacking ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17

Setting Up the Reader .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17

Installing the Interface Cable ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18

Configuring the Base Station ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20

Changing the Base Station Position ..............................................................................................................................................................................................21

Connecting the Base Station ............................................................................................................................................................................................................22

Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled .................................................................................................................................................................25

Linking the Reader to a Base Station .............................................................................................................................................................................................26

Linking a BT Reader to a PC ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................26

Gryphon™ 2D System and Network Layouts .............................................................................................................................................. 27

Stand Alone Layouts ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................27

Interface Selection ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 29

Setting the Interface ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................29

Customizing Configuration Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 33

Configure Interface Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................................................33

Global Interface Features ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................33

Configuring Other Features ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................33

Software Version Transmission .......................................................................................................................................................................................................33

Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults .....................................................................................................................................................................34

Replacing the Battery ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................35

CONFIGURATION USING BAR CODES............................................................................................................................................ 37

Configuration Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................................................................37

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES .................................................................................................................................................. 39

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore .............................................................................................................................................................................39

USB Suspend Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................................................39

RS-232 Only Interface............................................................................................................................................................. 41

Baud Rate ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................42

Data Bits .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................43

Stop Bits ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................43

Parity ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................44

Handshaking Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................................45

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces................................................................................................................................................... 46

Intercharacter Delay .......................................................................................................................................................................................................47

Beep On ASCII BEL ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................47

Beep On Not on File .......................................................................................................................................................................................................48

ACK NAK Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................49

Product Reference Guide 1

Contents

ACK Character ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................50

NAK Character ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................50

ACK NAK Timeout Value ...............................................................................................................................................................................................51

ACK NAK Retry Count ....................................................................................................................................................................................................51

ACK NAK Error Handling ...............................................................................................................................................................................................52

Indicate Transmission Failure .....................................................................................................................................................................................52

Disable Character ............................................................................................................................................................................................................53

Enable Character .............................................................................................................................................................................................................53

Keyboard Settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 55

Country Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................56

Send Control Characters ..............................................................................................................................................................................................60

Wedge Quiet Interval ....................................................................................................................................................................................................61

Intercode Delay ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................61

Caps Lock State ................................................................................................................................................................................................................62

Numlock .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................62

USB Keyboard Speed .....................................................................................................................................................................................................62

USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad ................................................................................................................................................................................64

USB-OEM Interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 65

USB-OEM Device Usage ................................................................................................................................................................................................66

Interface Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................66

IBM 46XX Interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 67

46xx Number of Host Resets .......................................................................................................................................................................................68

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format ..........................................................................................................................................................................70

Interface Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................70

Wand Emulation Interface ..................................................................................................................................................... 71

Wand Signal Speed ........................................................................................................................................................................................................72

Wand Polarity ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................72

Wand Idle State ................................................................................................................................................................................................................73

Transmit Noise .................................................................................................................................................................................................................73

Label Symbology Conversion .....................................................................................................................................................................................74

Data Format ............................................................................................................................................................................ 75

Global Prefix/Suffix ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 76

Global AIM ID ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 77

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 ...............................................................................................................................................................................................79

Label ID .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 80

Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................80

Individually Set Label ID .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................81

Label ID Control ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................81

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies ..............................................................................................................................................82

Advanced Formatting: User Label Edit ...................................................................................................................................................................87

Case Conversion ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................87

Character Conversion ....................................................................................................................................................................................................88

Reading Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................. 89

Double Read Timeout ...................................................................................................................................................................................................90

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS ................................................................................................................................................... 92

Power On Alert .................................................................................................................................................................................................................92

Good Read: When to Indicate .....................................................................................................................................................................................92

Good Read Beep Type ...................................................................................................................................................................................................93

Good Read Beep Frequency .......................................................................................................................................................................................93

Good Read Beep Length ..............................................................................................................................................................................................94

Good Read Beep Volume .............................................................................................................................................................................................95

Good Read LED Duration .............................................................................................................................................................................................96

SCANNING FEATURES ................................................................................................................................................................. 97

Scan Mode .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................97

Stand Mode Indication ..................................................................................................................................................................................................98

Stand Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................99

Pick Mode ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100

Stand Mode Sensitivity .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 100

Stand Mode Illumination Off Time ........................................................................................................................................................................ 101

Scanning Active Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 101

Stand Illumination Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 102

2 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Contents

Motion Still Timeout ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 102

Flash On Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 103

Flash Off Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 103

Aiming Pointer .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 104

Aiming Duration Timer .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 104

Green Spot Duration ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 105

Mobile Phone Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 105

Partial Label Reading Control .................................................................................................................................................................................. 106

Decode Negative Image ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 106

Image Capture .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 107

MULTIPLE LABEL READING ......................................................................................................................................................107

Multiple Labels per Frame ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 107

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology ................................................................................................................................................. 108

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length ......................................................................................................................................................... 108

1D Symbologies .................................................................................................................................................................... 109

1D Code Selection ......................................................................................................................................................................................109

DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES ....................................................................................................................................................110

CODE EAN/UPC ..........................................................................................................................................................................111

Coupon Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 111

UPC-A ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 112

UPC-A Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 112

UPC-A Check Character Transmission .................................................................................................................................................................. 112

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 113

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................. 113

UPC-A 2D Component ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 114

UPC-E ..........................................................................................................................................................................................114

UPC-E Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 114

UPC-E Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................... 115

UPC-E 2D Component ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 115

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 116

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 116

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission ............................................................................................................................................... 117

GTIN FORMATTING ....................................................................................................................................................................117

EAN 13 (JAN 13) .........................................................................................................................................................................118

EAN 13 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 118

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................ 118

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 119

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 119

EAN-13 2D Component ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 120

ISSN ............................................................................................................................................................................................120

ISSN Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120

EAN 8 (JAN 8) .............................................................................................................................................................................121

EAN 8 Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 121

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................... 121

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 122

EAN 8 2D Component ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 122

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS ....................................................................................................................................................123

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check .................................................................................................................................................................................. 123

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 124

ADD-ONS ....................................................................................................................................................................................125

Optional Add-ons ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 125

Optional Add-On Timer ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 126

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer ........................................................................................................................................................................... 129

CODE 39 ......................................................................................................................................................................................132

Code 39 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 132

Code 39 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 132

Code 39 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 133

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 134

Code 39 Full ASCII ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 134

Code 39 Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 135

Code 39 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 135

Code 39 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 136

Product Reference Guide 3

Contents

4

Code 39 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 137

TRIOPTIC CODE ..........................................................................................................................................................................138

Trioptic Code Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................. 138

CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE) ...............................................................................................................................138

Code 32 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 138

Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 139

Code 32 Check Char Transmission ........................................................................................................................................................................ 139

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 139

CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL) .............................................................................................................................140

Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 140

CODE 39 DANISH PPT ................................................................................................................................................................140

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................................................................................... 140

CODE 39 LAPOSTE .....................................................................................................................................................................141

Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................ 141

CODE 39 PZN ..............................................................................................................................................................................141

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................... 141

CODE 128 ...................................................................................................................................................................................142

Code 128 Enable/Disable .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 142

Expand Code 128 to Code 39 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 142

Code 128 Check Character Transmission ............................................................................................................................................................ 143

Code 128 Function Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 143

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission .................................................................................................................................................... 144

Code 128 Quiet Zones ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 144

Code 128 Length Control .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 145

Code 128 Set Length 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 146

Code 128 Set Length 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 147

GS1-128 ......................................................................................................................................................................................148

GS1-128 Enable ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 148

GS1-128 2D Component ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 148

CODE ISBT 128 ...........................................................................................................................................................................149

ISBT 128 Concatenation ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 149

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 149

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................ 150

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout ........................................................................................................................................................ 151

ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options ...................................................................................................................................................... 151

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) .................................................................................................................................................152

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 152

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 153

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission .................................................................................................................................................................. 154

I 2 of 5 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 154

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 155

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 156

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR .....................................................................................................................................................157

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................ 157

FOLLETT 2 OF 5 ..........................................................................................................................................................................157

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................... 157

STANDARD 2 OF 5 .....................................................................................................................................................................158

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 158

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................... 158

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................. 159

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 159

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 160

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 161

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 ....................................................................................................................................................................162

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 162

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................... 162

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................ 163

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 163

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 164

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 165

CODE IATA ..................................................................................................................................................................................166

IATA Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 166

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Contents

IATA Check Character Transmission ..................................................................................................................................................................... 166

CODABAR ...................................................................................................................................................................................167

Codabar Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 167

Codabar Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 167

Codabar Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 168

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 168

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set .......................................................................................................................................................................... 169

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match ................................................................................................................................................................... 169

Codabar Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 170

Codabar Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 170

Codabar Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 171

Codabar Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 172

ABC CODABAR ...........................................................................................................................................................................173

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................. 173

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................... 173

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout .............................................................................................................................................. 174

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation ....................................................................................................................................................................... 175

CODE 11 ......................................................................................................................................................................................176

Code 11 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 176

Code 11 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 176

Code 11 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 177

Code 11 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 177

Code 11 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 178

Code 11 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 179

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL .......................................................................................................................................180

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................... 180

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation ....................................................................................................................................... 180

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component .............................................................................................................................................. 181

GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED .....................................................................................................................................................181

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................ 181

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation ................................................................................................................................................... 182

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component ........................................................................................................................................................... 182

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control ........................................................................................................................................................... 183

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................. 184

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................. 185

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED ..........................................................................................................................................................186

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................. 186

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation ........................................................................................................................................................ 186

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component ................................................................................................................................................................ 187

CODE 93 ......................................................................................................................................................................................187

Code 93 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 187

Code 93 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 188

Code 93 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 188

Code 93 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 189

Code 93 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 190

Code 93 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 191

Code 93 Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 192

MSI ..............................................................................................................................................................................................192

MSI Enable/Disable ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 192

MSI Check Character Calculation ........................................................................................................................................................................... 193

MSI Check Character Transmission ........................................................................................................................................................................ 193

MSI Length Control ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194

MSI Set Length 1 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 195

MSI Set Length 2 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 196

PLESSEY ......................................................................................................................................................................................197

Plessey Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 197

Plessey Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................... 197

Plessey Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................ 198

Plessey Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 198

Plessey Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 199

Plessey Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 200

2D Symbologies .................................................................................................................................................................... 201

Product Reference Guide 5

Contents

2D Global Features .....................................................................................................................................................................................201

2D Maximum Decoding Time ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 202

2D Structured Append .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 203

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 203

Aztec Code ..................................................................................................................................................................................................204

Aztec Code Enable / Disable .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 204

Aztec Code Length Control ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 204

Aztec Code Set Length 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 205

Aztec Code Set Length 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 206

China Sensible Code ...................................................................................................................................................................................207

China Sensible Code Enable / Disable ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 207

China Sensible Code Length Control ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 207

China Sensible Code Set Length 1 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 208

China Sensible Code Set Length 2 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 209

Data Matrix .................................................................................................................................................................................................210

Data Matrix Enable / Disable ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 210

Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 210

Data Matrix Length Control ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 211

Data Matrix Set Length 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 211

Data Matrix Set Length 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 212

Maxicode .....................................................................................................................................................................................................213

Maxicode Enable / Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 213

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................................ 213

Maxicode Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 214

Maxicode Set Length 1 .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 214

Maxicode Set Length 2 .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 215

PDF417 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................216

PDF417 Enable / Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 216

PDF417 Length Control ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 216

PDF417 Set Length 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 217

PDF417 Set Length 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 218

Micro PDF417 ..............................................................................................................................................................................................219

Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 219

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation .......................................................................................................................................................................... 219

Micro PDF417 Length Control ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 220

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 220

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 221

QR Code .......................................................................................................................................................................................................222

QR Code Enable / Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 222

QR Code Length Control ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 222

QR Code Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 223

QR Code Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 224

Micro QR Code ............................................................................................................................................................................................225

Micro QR Code Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 225

Micro QR Code Length Control .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 225

Micro QR Code Set Length 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 226

Micro QR Code Set Length 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 227

UCC Composite ...........................................................................................................................................................................................228

UCC Composite Enable / Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 228

UCC Optional Composite Timer ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 229

Postal Code Selection .................................................................................................................................................................................230

Postnet BB Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 231

WIRELESS FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................ 233

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES ...................................................................................................................................................234

Good Transmission Beep .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 234

Beep Frequency ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 234

Beep Duration ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 235

Beep Volume ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 236

Disconnect Beep .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 236

Docking Beep ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 237

Leash Alarm .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 237

CONFIGURATION UPDATES ......................................................................................................................................................239

6 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Contents

Automatic Configuration Update .......................................................................................................................................................................... 239

Copy Configuration to Scanner .............................................................................................................................................................................. 239

Copy Configuration to Base Station ...................................................................................................................................................................... 239

BATCH FEATURES ......................................................................................................................................................................240

Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 240

Send Batch ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 240

Erase Batch Memory ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 241

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay ............................................................................................................................................................................... 241

DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK .........................................................................................................................................................242

Bluetooth-Only Features...................................................................................................................................................... 243

RF ADDRESS STAMPING ............................................................................................................................................................243

Source Radio Address Transmission ..................................................................................................................................................................... 243

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character ........................................................................................................................................................ 244

Link Timeout .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 244

BT SECURITY FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................245

BT Security Mode ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 245

BT PIN Code .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 246

Select PIN Code Length ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 246

Set PIN Code .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 246

OTHER BT FEATURES .................................................................................................................................................................247

BT Poll Rate ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 247

Power Off ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 248

Powerdown Timeout .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 248

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY .................................................................................................................................. 249

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout ................................................................................................................................................................................. 249

STAR Radio Transmit Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 250

Motion Features................................................................................................................................................................... 251

Motion Aiming Control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 251

Motion Sensitivity ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 252

Motionless Timeout .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 252

REFERENCES................................................................................................................................................................................. 253

RS-232 Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................................................254

RS-232 Only ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 254

RS-232/USB COM Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 255

Keyboard Interface .....................................................................................................................................................................................262

Wedge Quiet Interval ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 262

Intercharacter Delay ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 263

Intercode Delay .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 264

Symbologies ...............................................................................................................................................................................................265

Set Length ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 265

Data Editing ................................................................................................................................................................................................266

Global Prefix/Suffix ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 267

Global AIM ID ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 268

Label ID ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 269

Character Conversion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 274

Reading Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................................275

Label Gone Timeout ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 275

Good Read LED Duration ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 276

Scanning Features ......................................................................................................................................................................................277

Scan Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 277

Stand Mode Off Time ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 278

Scanning Active Time ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 279

Aiming Duration Time ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 280

Flash On Time ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 281

Flash Off Time ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 282

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology ...................................................................................................................................................................... 283

RF Features .................................................................................................................................................................................................285

Automatic Configuration Update ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 285

RF Address Stamping ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 285

BT-Only Features ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 287

Motion Features .........................................................................................................................................................................................288

Product Reference Guide 7

Contents

Motionless Timeout .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 288

MESSAGE FORMATTING.............................................................................................................................................................. 289

Message Formatting ..................................................................................................................................................................................289

LED and Beeper Control .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 290

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................................................................................... 291

Imager Labeling ..........................................................................................................................................................................................295

Standard Cable Pinouts .............................................................................................................................................................................296

LED and Beeper Indications .......................................................................................................................................................................298

Error Codes ..................................................................................................................................................................................................299

Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) ...................................................................................................................................300

STANDARD DEFAULTS ................................................................................................................................................................ 301

SAMPLE BAR CODES.................................................................................................................................................................... 313

KEYPAD ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 317

SCANCODE TABLES ..................................................................................................................................................................... 319

Control Character Emulation .....................................................................................................................................................................319

Single Press and Release Keys ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 319

Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE ...............................................................................................320

Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode ...........................................................................................................322

Digital Interface ..........................................................................................................................................................................................324

IBM31xx 102-key ........................................................................................................................................................................................325

IBM XT ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................326

Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 .........................................................................................................................................................327

8 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 1

Introduction

About this Manual

This Product Reference Guide (PRG) is provided for users seeking advanced technical information, including connection, programming, maintenance and specifications. The Quick

Reference Guide (QRG) and other publications associated with this product are downloadable free of charge from the website listed on the back cover of this manual.

Overview

Chapter 1, (this chapter) presents information about manual conventions, and an overview of

the reader, its features and operation.

Chapter 2, Setup

presents information about unpacking, cable connection information and setting up the reader.

Chapter 3, Configuration Using Bar Codes

provides instructions and bar code labels for customizing your reader. There are different sections for interface types, general features, data formatting, symbology-specific and model-specific features.

Chapter 4, References

provides background information and detailed instructions for more complex programming items.

Chapter 5, Message Formatting

gives details for programming options.

Appendix A,

Technical Specifications lists physical and performance characteristics, as well as

environmental and regulatory specifications. It also provides standard cable pinouts and LED/

Beeper functions.

Appendix B, Standard Defaults references common factory default settings for reader features and

options.

Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes offers sample bar codes for several common symbologies.

Appendix D, Keypad

includes numeric bar codes to be scanned for certain parameter settings.

Appendix E, Scancode Tables

lists control character emulation information for Wedge and USB

Keyboard interfaces.

Product Reference Guide 9

Introduction References

Manual Conventions

The following conventions are used in this document:

The symbols listed below are used in this manual to notify the reader of key issues or procedures that must be observed when using the reader:

Notes contain information necessary for properly diagnosing, repairing and operating the reader.

CAUTION

The CAUTION symbol advises you of actions that could damage equipment or property.

References

Current versions of this Product Reference Guide (PRG), Quick Reference Guide (QRG), the

Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration application, and any other manuals, instruction sheets and utilities for this product can be downloaded from the website listed below. Alternatively, printed copies or product support CDs for most products can be purchased through your Datalogic reseller.

Technical Support

Datalogic Website Support

The Datalogic website ( www.scanning.datalogic.com

) is the complete source for technical support and information for Datalogic products. The site offers product support, product registration, warranty information, product manuals, product tech notes, software updates, demos, and instructions for returning products for repair.

Reseller Technical Support

An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized Datalogic reseller.

A reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses, application software, and computer systems and can provide individualized assistance.

Telephone Technical Support

If you do not have internet or email access, you may contact Datalogic technical support at

(541) 349-8283 or check the back cover of your manual for more contact information.

10 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

About the Reader Introduction

About the Reader

Typically, units are factory-programmed for the most common terminal and communications settings. If you need to modify any programmable settings, custom configuration can be accomplished by scanning the programming bar codes within this guide.

Two models of the Gryphon 2D are available, and are covered in this manual:

• Gryphon I GD44XX - Corded 2D imager bar code reader

• Gryphon I GBT4400 - Model with Bluetooth options.

Programming can alternatively be performed using the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration application which is downloadable from the Datalogic website listed on the back cover of this manual. This multi-platform utility program allows device configuration using a PC. It communicates to the device using a serial or USB cable and can also create configuration bar codes to print.

Advancements in the LED technology used in the imager-based readers significantly improve the illumination of the target field of view, resulting in higher scan efficiency. Whether used in

Single Trigger or Continuous Mode, the ergonomic design of the reader will help to promote comfortable handling during extended periods of use.

See

"Interface Selection" on page 29

for a listing and descriptions of available interface sets by model type.

Product Reference Guide 11

Introduction The BC40xx™ Radio Base

The BC40xx™ Radio Base

Base LEDs

LEDs on the Gryphon Base provide information about the Base’s status, as shown in Figure 1 .

Figure 1. Gryphon Base LEDs

YELLOW LED

RED LED /

GREEN LED

BUTTON

The following table describes the significance of each LED:

LED

Power on / Data

STATUS

Yellow On = Base is powered

Yellow Blinking = Base receives data and  commands from the Host or the Reader.

Charging Red On = Battery charging is in progress.

Charge completed

Charging + Charge completed

Green On = the Battery is completely charged.

Red and Green Blinking together = the Reader is not correctly placed onto the Base.

See

Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) on page 300

for more specific details on the

LEDs.

Base Button

The Base contains a button which is used primarily to perform a paging function. Pressing the button causes a sound signal to be emitted by all scanners linked with this Base, as long as the scanner is awake (see

Powerdown Timeout on page 248 ) and reception is enabled (see

LED and

Beeper Indicators on page 92 ). The button can also be used to "force device connection" via the

Datalogic Aladdin Software tool (available for free download from the Datalogic website). See the Aladdin Online Help for details.

See

"Base Station Button Indicators" on page 300 for further information on Base Button

functions.

12 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection Introduction

BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection

The BC40XX Radio Base is available with a UV Counterfeit Money Detector, typically used to verify the authenticity of bank notes. Other uses for counterfeit detection are passport, ticket, credit card, travelers’ check and similar applications where it is possible to detect fluorescent marks with UV light.

The detector contains eight special UV LEDs, as shown below:

UV LEDs

The Counterfeit Detector is based on UV fluorescent emission. Real banknotes under ultraviolet rays usually absorb the UV light and will show special marks made with fluorescent inks. On the other hand, most counterfeit banknotes only reflect the UV lights, without showing fluorescent marks.

To use:

1. Quickly press the Base button to light the UV LEDs.

2. Hold the item to be verified under the LED lights to ensure that the special fluorescent marks are visible.

Product Reference Guide 13

Introduction Battery Safety

3. The LEDs are set to switch off automatically after about 2 minutes. To keep the UV LEDs in always-on mode, quickly press the Base button a second time within 10 seconds of the first press. To switch them off, simply press the button again.

An external power supply is necessary for full functionality of the Base station with UV

Counterfeit Detector. Use only the recommended AC adapter 12Vdc.

Battery Safety

To reinstall, charge and/or perform any other action on the battery, follow the instructions in this manual.

Before installing the Battery, read “Battery Safety” on this and the following pages. Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.

WARNING

Do not discharge the battery using any device except for the scanner. When the battery is used in devices other than the designated product, it may damage the battery or reduce its life expectancy. If the device causes an abnormal current to flow, it may cause the battery to become hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury.

Lithium-ion battery packs may get hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury if exposed to abusive conditions. Be sure to follow the safety warnings listed below:

• Do not place the battery pack in fire or heat.

• Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the battery pack to each other with any metal object (such as wire).

• Do not carry or store the battery pack together with metal objects.

• Do not pierce the battery pack with nails, strike it with a hammer, step on it or otherwise subject it to strong impacts or shocks.

• Do not solder directly onto the battery pack.

• Do not expose the battery pack to liquids, or allow the battery to get wet.

• Do not apply voltages to the battery pack contacts.

In the event the battery pack leaks and the fluid gets into your eye, do not rub the eye. Rinse well with water and immediately seek medical care. If left untreated, the battery fluid could cause damage to the eye.

14 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Battery Safety Introduction

CAUTION

Always charge the battery at 32° – 104°F (0° - 40°C) temperature range.

Use only the authorized power supplies, battery pack, chargers, and docks supplied by your Datalogic reseller. The use of any other power supplies can damage the device and void your warranty.

Do not disassemble or modify the battery. The battery contains safety and protection devices, which, if damaged, may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite.

Do not place the battery in or near fire, on stoves or other high temperature locations.

Do not place the battery in direct sunlight, or use or store the battery inside cars in hot weather.

Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite. Using the battery in this manner may also result in a loss of performance and a shortened life expectancy.

Do not place the battery in microwave ovens, high-pressure containers or on induction cookware.

Immediately discontinue use of the battery if, while using, charging or storing the battery, the battery emits an unusual smell, feels hot, changes color or shape, or appears abnormal in any other way.

Do not replace the battery pack when the device is turned on.

Do not remove or damage the battery pack’s label.

Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any part.

Battery pack usage by children should be supervised.

As with other types of batteries, Lithium-Ion (LI) batteries will lose capacity over time. Capacity deterioration is noticeable after one year of service whether the battery is in use or not. It is difficult to precisely predict the finite life of a LI battery, but cell manufacturers rate them at

500 charge cycles. In other words, the batteries should be expected to take 500 full discharge / charge cycles before needing replacement. This number is higher if partial discharging / recharging is adhered to rather than full / deep discharging,

The typical manufacturer advertised useful life of LI batteries is one to three years, depending on usage and number of charges, etc., after which they should be removed from service, especially in mission critical applications. Do not continue to use a battery that is showing excessive loss of capacity, it should be properly recycled / disposed of and replaced. For most applications, batteries should be replaced after one year of service to maintain customer satisfaction and minimize safety concerns.

Collect and recycle waste batteries separately from the device in compliance with European

Directive 2006/66/EC, 2002/95/EC, 2002/96/EC and subsequent modifications, US and

China regulatory and others laws and regulations about the environment.

Product Reference Guide 15

Introduction

Programming the Reader

Programming the Reader

Configuration Methods

Programming Bar Codes

The reader is factory-configured with a standard set of default features. After scanning the interface bar code, you can select other options and customize your reader through use of the instructions and programming bar code labels available in the corresponding features section for your interface. Customizable settings for many features are found in

"Configuration Parameters" starting on page 37

.

Some programming labels, like

"Restore Custom Defaults" on page 34 , require only the scan of the

single label to enact the change. Most, however, require the reader to be placed in Programming

Mode prior to scanning them. Scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code once to enter Programming

Mode. Once the reader is in Programming Mode, scan a number of parameter settings before scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code a second time, which will then accept your changes, exit

Programming Mode and return the reader to normal operation.

There are some exceptions to the typical programming sequence described above. Please read the description and setting instructions carefully when configuring each programmable feature.

Datalogic Aladdin™

Datalogic Aladdin™ is a multi-platform utility program providing a quick and user-friendly configuration method via the RS-232/USB-COM interface. Aladdin is available on the CD-

ROM provided with your product, and also from the Datalogic website. Aladdin allows you to program the reader by selecting configuration commands through a user-friendly graphical interface running on a PC. These commands are sent to the reader over the selected communication interface, or they can be printed as bar codes to be scanned.

Aladdin also provides the ability to perform a software upgrade for the connected device (see the

Datalogic Aladdin™ Help On-Line for more details).

16 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 2

Setup

Unpacking

Check carefully to ensure the reader and any accessories ordered are present and undamaged. If any damage occurred during shipment, contact Datalogic Technical Support. Information is shown on

page 10 .

KEEP THE PACKAGING. Should the unit ever require service, it should be returned in its original shipping container.

Setting Up the Reader

Depending on whether you are using a Corded or BT version of the Gryphon, f ollow the steps provided in this section to connect and get your reader up and communicating with its host.

1. Begin by

Installing the Interface Cable

(Corded) or Connecting the Base Station

(BT)

2. Go to

Interface Selection and set the desired interface.

3.

Configure Interface Settings

(only if not using factory settings for that interface)

4. Go to

Configuring Other Features (if modifications are needed from factory settings)

Product Reference Guide 17

Setup Installing the Interface Cable

Installing the Interface Cable

For Corded versions, c onnect the reader cable by inserting the cable into the handle as shown in

Figure 2 . To remove it, insert a paper clip into the release aperture, then unplug the cable.

Figure 2. Connect/disconnect the cable

RS-232 Serial Connection

Turn off power to the terminal/PC and connect the reader to the terminal/PC serial port via the

RS-232 cable as shown in Figure 3

. If the terminal will not support POT (Power Off the

Terminal) to supply reader power, use the approved power supply (AC Adapter). Plug the AC

Adapter barrel connector into the socket on the RS-232 cable connector and the AC Adapter plug into a standard power outlet.

Figure 3. RS-232 Connection

18 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Installing the Interface Cable

Keyboard Wedge Connection

Setup

The Keyboard Wedge cable has a ‘Y’ connection from the reader. Connect the female to the male end from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port at the terminal/PC.

Reference

Figure 4

.

Figure 4. Keyboard Wedge Interface connection

USB Connection

Connect the reader to a USB port on the terminal/PC using the correct USB cable for the interface type you ordered. Reference

Figure 5 .

Figure 5. USB connection

Other connection types are described below and illustrated in Figure 6 .

Product Reference Guide 19

Setup

Figure 6. Other Interface Connections

Configuring the Base Station or...

IB d

W an

M

K ey

W edg or...

bo e

Specific cables are required for connection to different hosts. The connectors illustrated above are examples only. Actual connectors may vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the reader remain the same.

RF Models

The power supply connects directly to the base (not on the cable's jack) for all configurations.

For all interfaces (except RS-232) a power supply is recommended but not necessary, because the base can be powered from the Host. When the base is powered from the Host, select a slow charge rate.

Configuring the Base Station

The base charger/station may be configured in desk application to hold the reader in two different positions, either a horizontal or standing position, in order to provide the most comfortable use depending on needs.

20

Standing Horizontal

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Configuring the Base Station Setup

Changing the Base Station Position

The base station is configured by installing one of two sets of mechanical parts that come with the cordless kit. The default mounts (shown below) provide three options: vertical (wall) mounting, standing (45°), or horizontal mounting with a higher mechanical retention of the scanner. Use the other mounts only for horizontal mounting, with lower retention of the scanner. The different parts may be interchanged to customize retention preferences.

A tool such as a rigid pen or a flat screwdriver can be used to change the mounts. Do not allow it to touch the contacts.

1. Insert the appropriate parts for the desired base station position, as shown below.

Standing,

Horizontal or Vertical

Horizontal

ONLY

To ensure best contact and performance, do not intermix the parts of the two different mount sets.

CAUTION

2. Using your thumbs, push open the plastic tabs on the bottom of the base to free the wing holders.

Tab

Tab

Product Reference Guide 21

Setup Configuring the Base Station

3. The stand can now be repositioned in either horizontal or standing position.

Horizontal

Standing

Connecting the Base Station

Figure 7 shows how to connect the Base Station to a terminal, PC or other host device. Turn off the host before connection and consult the manual for that equipment (if necessary) before proceeding. Connect the interface cable before applying power to the Base Station.

The Gryphon GBT4400 can be set up to require a PIN code when connecting to the host. If you are connecting to a system that uses a custom security PIN, follow the

procedure in "Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled" on page 25 . For

information on how to configure this feature, see "BT Security Mode" starting on page

245 .

Base Station Connection and Routing: Fully insert the Power Cable and Interface (I/F) Cable connectors into their respective ports in the underside of the Base Station (see Figure 7 ). Then connect to an AC Adapter, and plug the AC power cord into the (wall) outlet.

Gryphon Wireless can also be Powered by the Terminal. The external power supply is recommended but not necessary. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is automatically set as Slow charge.

For some specific interfaces or hosts or lengths of cable, the use of an external

power supply may be recommended for full recharging capability (see "Technical

Specifications" on page 291 for more details).

22 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Configuring the Base Station

Figure 7. Connecting the Base Station

Setup

I/F Cable

Base

Cord

Station

DC Power

AC/DC

Adapter

Wall plug

Connector

Securing the DC Power Cord (Optional)

The DC power cord for the adapter can be secured to the bottom of the base in order to maximize the mechanical retention of the cable itself. The routing of the power cord can be changed to accommodate the base station positioning: horizontal, stand or wall mounting. The cables can be looped around to the front of the Base Station, or fed directly out the back of the

Base Station, as shown in Figure 8 on page 23 .

Figure 8. Options for routing the DC cord

Please refer to the arrows depicted on the bottom of the base when placing the cables, detailed in

Figure 9 .

Product Reference Guide 23

Setup

Figure 9. Arrows showing routing

Configuring the Base Station

24

Host Connection: Verify before connection that the reader’s cable type is compatible with your host equipment.

Most connections plug directly into the host device as shown in

Figure 10 . Keyboard Wedge

interface cables have a ‘Y’ connection where its female end mates with the male end of the cable from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port on the terminal/PC.

Figure 10. Connecting to the Host or...

US

B

W an d

K

W ey ed or...

bo ge ard or...

IB

M

Power Connection : Plug the AC Adapter in to an approved AC wall socket with the cable facing downwards (as shown in Figure 7 ) to prevent undue strain on the socket.

Gryphon Wireless can also be Powered by the Terminal. The external power supply is recommended but not necessary. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is automatically set as Slow charge.

Disconnecting the Cable: To detach the cable, insert a paper clip or similar object into the hole on the base, as shown in Figure 11 .

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Configuring the Base Station

Figure 11. Disconnecting the Cable

Insert

Paper Clip

Setup

Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled

When connecting the Base to a system that has a custom Security Pin enabled, follow the steps below in the order shown:

1. Power down the host system.

2. Connect the appropriate interface cable into the Base as shown in

Figure 10 .

3. Place the reader in the Base.

4. Power up the host. The reader will link to the Base

5. When the host completely powers up, a new custom Security Pin Code may be sent to the reader and Base, depending on host configuration. Contact Datalogic Technical Support for more information.

If you want to change security settings or set up a PIN, see "BT Security

Mode" starting on page 245

.

Product Reference Guide 25

Setup Configuring the Base Station

Linking the Reader to a Base Station

RF Devices

For RF devices, before configuring the interface it is necessary to link the handheld with the base. To link the handheld and the base, press the trigger to wake it and place it on the base. If the reader was previously linked to another base, you must first scan the Unlink action command before re-linking to the new base.

Unlnk

Unlnk

BT Models only

Remember: The mandatory condition for establishing a new linking between a BT handheld and a BT base is that the handheld is unlinked and they share the same security configuration. A successful link is indicated by three ascending tones from the reader. A high-low-high-low tone indicates the link attempt was unsuccessful. A single green LED flash after this tone indicates no

Base Station was discovered. Two green LED flashes after this tone indicates that more than one

Base Station was discovered and the reader did not link. Three LED flashes after this tone indicate a security error.

Linking a BT Reader to a PC

The reader can optionally be linked to a Bluetooth-enabled PC with the serial port profile, in either server mode or client mode.

Linking to a PC in Server Mode (BT Slave Mode)

To link a BT reader in server mode to a Bluetooth-enabled PC, follow these steps:

1. Install any drivers provided with the Bluetooth adapter.

2. Scan the bar code below to make the scanner visible to the host computer.

³ L n k S v

Link to a PC in Server Mode

3. Use the host computer’s Bluetooth manager to “Discover new devices” and select "Datalogic Scanner." If you receive an error message, it may be necessary to disable security on the device.

4. Select “connect” on the PC to link the reader to the PC. Use an RS-232 terminal program to see incoming data on the port designated by the computer's Bluetooth manager.

26 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Gryphon™ 2D System and Network Layouts Setup

Linking to a PC in Client Mode (BT Master Mode)

The reader can optionally be linked in client mode to a Bluetooth-enabled PC with the serial port profile. To do this, follow these steps:

1. Ensure the PC or terminal can network with Bluetooth devices and that it is powered on.

2. Ensure that a COM port is assigned under Services within the Bluetooth setup menu.

3. Create a Link label that contains the address of the PC Bluetooth adapter.

The Bluetooth address can be found under "Properties" within in the

Bluetooth setup menu.

NOTE

The link label is a Code 128 function 3 label with the following format:

<FN3 char>LnkB<12 character Bluetooth address>

4. Scan the link label you created in step 3.

Power Off

Shuts off power to the BT handheld until next trigger pull . This function only applies to the BT model.

Gryphon™ 2D System and Network Layouts

Stand Alone Layouts

Figure 12 . Single Reader Layout

Product Reference Guide 27

Setup

Figure 13 . Multiple Reader Layout

Wireless models only

(not valid for BT model)

Gryphon™ 2D System and Network Layouts

In stand alone systems, each base station is connected to a single Host.

Figure 14 . Multiple Stand Alone Layouts

28

Mobile models only

(not valid for BT model)

Many stand alone connections can operate in the same physical area without interference, provided all readers and base stations in the system have different addresses.

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interface Selection Setup

Interface Selection

Upon completing the physical connection between the reader and its host, proceed to Table 1

starting on page 30 to select the interface type the reader is connected to (for example: RS-232,

Keyboard Wedge, USB, etc.). Scan the appropriate bar code in that section to configure your system’s correct interface type.

Each reader model will support one of the following sets of host interfaces:

General Purpose Models

• RS-232

• RS-232 OPOS

• USB-COM

• Keyboard Wedge

• Wand Emulation (BT only)

Retail Point of Sale Models

• RS-232

• RS-232 OPOS

• USB

• IBM 46XX

Setting the Interface

Scan the programming bar code from this section which selects the appropriate interface type matching the system the reader will be connected to. Next, proceed to the corresponding section in this manual (also listed in

Table 1 on page 30

) to configure any desired settings and features associated with that interface.

Unlike some programming features and options, interface selections require that you scan only one programming bar code label. DO NOT scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code prior to scanning an interface selection bar code.

Some interfaces require the scanner to start in the disabled state when powered up. If additional scanner configuration is desired while in this state, pull the trigger and hold it for five seconds. The scanner will change to a state that allows programming with bar codes.

Product Reference Guide 29

Setup

RS-232

Table 1. Available Interfaces

Interface Selection

FEATURES

RS-232 standard interface

Select RS232-STD

$P,HA12,P(CR)

RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf

Select RS232-WN

$P,HA13,P(CR)

Set RS-232

Interface

Features

starting on page 41

RS-232 for use with OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS

Select RS-232 OPOS

$P,HA47,P(CR)

USB Com to simulate RS-232 standard interface

Select USB-COM-STD a

IBM

$P,HA08,P(CR)

IBM-46xx Port 5B reader interface

Select IBM-P5B

$P,HA23,P(CR)

IBM-46xx Port 9B reader interface

Select IBM-P9B

USB-OEM

$P,HA45,P(CR)

USB-OEM

(can be used for OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS)

Select USB-OEM a. Download the correct USB Com driver from www.datalogic.com

FEATURES

Set IBM

Interface

Features

starting on page 67

FEATURES

Set USB-OEM

Interface

Features

starting on page 65

30 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interface Selection Setup

KEYBOARD

$P,HA2B,P(CR)

USB Keyboard with alternate key encoding

Select USB Alternate Keyboard

AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70,

80, 90 & 95 w/Standard Key Encoding

$P,HA29,P(CR)

Select KBD-AT

$P,HA11,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with standard key encoding but without external keyboard

Select KBD-AT-NK

$P,HA26,P(CR)

AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70,

80, 90 & 95 w/Alternate Key

Select KBD-AT-ALT

$P,HA10,P(CR)

FEATURES

Set KEYBOARD

WEDGE

Interface

Features

starting on page

55

Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with alternate key encoding but without external keyboard

Select KBD-AT-ALT-NK

$P,HA28,P(CR)

PC/XT w/Standard Key Encoding

Select KBD-XT

$P,HA14,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminal 3153

Select KBD-IBM-3153

Product Reference Guide 31

Setup Interface Selection

KEYBOARD — cont.

Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals

31xx, 32xx, 34xx, 37xx make only keyboard

$P,HA15,P(CR)

Select KBD-IBM-M

$P,HA16,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals

31xx, 32xx, 34xx, 37xx make break keyboard

Select KBD-IBM-MB

$P,HA1B,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for DIGITAL Terminals VT2xx, VT3xx, VT4xx

Select KBD-DIG-VT

FEATURES

Set KEYBOARD

WEDGE

Interface

Features

starting on page 55

$P,HA35,P(CR)

USB Keyboard with standard key encoding

Select USB Keyboard

$P,HA2C,P(CR)

USB Keyboard for Apple computers

Select USB-KBD-APPLE

WAND EMULATION FEATURES

Wand Emulation

(BT only)

$P,HA24,P(CR)

Select WAND

Set WAND

Interface

Features

starting on page 71

32 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Customizing Configuration Settings

Customizing Configuration Settings

Setup

Configure Interface Settings

If after scanning the interface bar code from the previous table, your installation requires you to select options to further customize your reader, turn to the appropriate section for your interface type in

"Configuration Parameters" starting on page 37 .

"RS-232 Only Interface" on page 41

"RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46

"Keyboard Settings" on page 55

"RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46

"IBM 46XX Interface" on page 67

"Wand Emulation Interface" on page 71

Global Interface Features

See " Global Interface Features" on page 39 for settings configurable by all interface types.

Configuring Other Features

If your installation requires different programming than the standard factory default settings, the following sections of this manual allow configuration of non-interface-specific settings you might require:

Reading Parameters :

Reading Parameters include programming for scanning, beeper and LED indicators and other universal settings.

1D Symbologies :

Includes options concerning the bar code label types (symbologies). These settings allow you to enable/disable symbologies, set label lengths, require check digit, etc.

WIRELESS FEATURES :

Contains programming options for RF, STAR and Bluetooth models only.

Software Version Transmission

The software version of the device can be transmitted over the RS-232 and Keyboard interfaces by scanning the following label.

RevA

Transmit Software Version

Product Reference Guide 33

Setup Customizing Configuration Settings

Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults

Restore Custom Defaults

If you aren’t sure what programming options are in your imager, or you’ve changed some options and want to restore the Custom Default Configuration that may have been saved in the scanner, scan the Restore Custom Default Configuration bar code below. This will restore the custom configuration for the currently active interface.

Custom defaults are based on the interface type. Configure the imager for the correct interface before scanning this label.

$P,HA00,P(CR)

Restore Custom Default Configuration

Restore Factory Configuration

If you want to restore the Factory Configuration for your imager, scan either the Restore USA

Factory Configuration bar code or the Restore EU Factory Configuration bar code below. Both labels restore the scanner configuration to the factory settings, including the interface type. The

USA label restores Label IDs to those historically used in the USA. The EU label restores Label

IDs to those historically used in Europe. The Label ID sets for USA and EU are shown in the

“Label ID Control” section on page 81 of this manual.

$P,AE,P(CR)

Restore USA Factory Configuration

$P,Ae,P(CR)

34

Restore EU Factory Configuration

The programming items listed in the following sections show the factory default settings for each of the menu commands.

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Customizing Configuration Settings

Replacing the Battery

Setup

Before replacing the Battery, read "Battery Safety" starting on page 14

. Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.

To change the battery of your reader, complete the following instructions.

1. With a screwdriver, unscrew the battery cover screw.

2. Unscrew and remove the three screws securing the battery holder, and unplug the white connector.

Connector

Screw

Screw

3. Carefully lift out the gold contacts circuit, and remove the battery holder while letting the white connector pass through the hole in the battery holder (as shown in the picture below).

Pass-through hole

Gold contacts circuit

Product Reference Guide 35

Setup Customizing Configuration Settings

4. Remove the old battery from its place (if present), and insert the new battery in the same position.

5. Replace the battery holder and three screws, plug in the connector, and return the contacts circuit to its previous location.

When inserting the new battery into the handle, take care to position the battery and the connector as shown.

6. Insert the cover in the handle and screw it back into place.

Battery replacement is now complete.

36 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 3

Configuration Using Bar Codes

This and following sections provide programming bar codes to configure your reader by changing the default settings. For details about additional methods of programming, see

" Configuration Methods" on page 16 .

You must first enable your reader to read bar codes in order to use this section. If you have not done this, go to

Setup, starting on page 17 and

complete the appropriate procedure.

Configuration Parameters

Once the reader is set up, you can change the default parameters to meet your application needs.

Refer to

"Standard Defaults" starting on page 301 for initial configuration in order to set the

default values and select the interface for your application.

The following configuration parameters are divided into logical groups, making it easy to find the desired function based on its reference group.

Interface Configuration:

"RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46

"Keyboard Settings" on page 55

Parameters common to all interface applications:

"Data Format" on page 75 gives options to control the messages sent to the Host system.

"Reading Parameters" on page 89 control various operating modes and indicators status

functioning.

Symbology-specific parameters:

"1D Symbologies" on page 109 provides configuration of a personalized mix of 1D codes,

code families and their options.

"2D Symbologies" on page 201 provides configuration of a personalized mix of 2D codes,

code families and their options.

You must first enable your reader to read bar codes in order to use this section. If you have not done this, go to

Setup, starting on page 17 and

complete the appropriate procedure.

Product Reference Guide 37

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

To program features:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code, available at the top of each programming page, when applicable.

2. Scan the bar code to set the desired programming feature. You may need to cover unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to

Appendix D, Keypad , and scan the

appropriate characters from the keypad.

Additional information about many features can be found in the “References” chapter.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAM-

MING bar code to exit Programming Mode.

For more detailed descriptions, programming information and examples for setting selected configuration items, see

References, starting on page 253 .

By default, the handheld will decode bar code labels only when they are close to the center of the aiming pattern. This allows the handheld to accurately target labels when they are placed close together, such as on a pick sheet. See

Pick Mode, starting on page 100 .

38 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Global Interface Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES

The following interface features are configurable by all interface types.

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore

This option specifies whether the reader will obey or ignore host commands. When set to ignore, the reader will ignore all host commands except for those necessary for:

• service mode

• flash programming mode

• keeping the interface active

• transmission of labels.

$CIFIH00(CR)

DEFAULT

Host Commands = Obey

(Do Not Ignore Host Commands)

$CIFIH01(CR)

Host Commands = Ignore

$CUSSE01(CR)

USB Suspend Mode

This setting enables/disables the ability of USB interfaces to enter suspend mode.

$CUSSE00(CR)

DEFAULT

USB Suspend Mode = Disable

USB Suspend Mode = Enable

Product Reference Guide 39

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

NOTES

Global Interface Features

40 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 ONLY INTERFACE

B AUD R ATE on page 42

D ATA B ITS on page 43

S TOP B ITS on page 43

P ARITY on page 44

H ANDSHAKING C ONTROL on page 45

Use the programming bar codes in this section if modifications to the standard RS-232 interface settings are necessary to meet your system’s requirements. Additional settings which apply to both the RS-232 and USB interfaces are available in the next section,

"RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" starting on page 46.

Reference

Appendix B, Standard Defaults

for a listing of standard factory settings.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Baud Rate

See page 254 for information on this feature.

RS-232 Only Interface

$CR2BA00(CR)

Baud Rate = 1200

$CR2BA01(CR)

Baud Rate = 2400

$CR2BA03(CR)

Baud Rate = 9600

$CR2BA02(CR)

Baud Rate = 4800

DEFAULT

$CR2BA04(CR)

Baud Rate = 19,200

$CR2BA05(CR)

Baud Rate = 38,400

$CR2BA06(CR)

Baud Rate = 57,600

42

$CR2BA07(CR)

Baud Rate = 115,200

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Only Interface Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Bits

This parameter allows the reader to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol for sending and receiving data.

$CR2DA00(CR)

$CR2DA01(CR)

7 Data Bits

DEFAULT

8 Data Bits

Stop Bits

Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements. See

page 254 for more information on this feature.

$CR2ST00(CR)

DEFAULT

1 Stop Bit

$CR2ST01(CR)

2 Stop Bits

Product Reference Guide 43

Enter/Exit Programming Mode RS-232 Only Interface

Parity

This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. Select the parity type according to host device requirements. See

page 254 for more information.

$CR2PA00(CR)

DEFAULT

Parity = None

$CR2PA01(CR)

Parity = Even

$CR2PA02(CR)

Parity = Odd

44 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Only Interface

Handshaking Control

See page 254 for more information about this feature.

DEFAULT

$CR2HC01(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CR2HC00(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS

$CR2HC02(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/XON/XOFF

$CR2HC03(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS On/CTS

$CR2HC04(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS Scan Control

Product Reference Guide 45

RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES

I NTERCHARACTER D ELAY on page 47

B EEP O N ASCII BEL on page 47

B EEP O N N OT ON F ILE on page 48

ACK NAK O PTIONS on page 49

ACK C HARACTER on page 50

NAK C HARACTER on page 50

ACK NAK T IMEOUT V ALUE on page 51

ACK NAK R ETRY C OUNT on page 51

ACK NAK E RROR H ANDLING on page 52

I NDICATE T RANSMISSION F AILURE on page 52

D ISABLE C HARACTER on page 53

E NABLE C HARACTER on page 53

The programming bar codes in this chapter allow modifications to the standard RS-232 and USB-Com interfaces.

Reference

Appendix B, Standard Defaults

for a listing of standard factory settings.

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Intercharacter Delay

This parameter specifies the intercharacter de lay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next.

The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.

See page 263 for more information.

$CR2IC00(CR)

$CR2IC

Select Intercharacter Delay Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Intercharacter Delay = No Delay

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the

Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad

representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 00 = No Intercharacter Delay

Beep On ASCII BEL

When this parameter is enabled, the reader issues a beep when a <BEL> character is detected on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event.

$CR2BB00(CR)

DEFAULT

Beep On ASCII BEL = Disable

$CR2BB01(CR)

Product Reference Guide

Beep On ASCII BEL = Enable

47

Enter/Exit Programming Mode RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

Beep On Not on File

This option enables/disables the action of the reader to sound a three beep sequence upon receiving a Not-On-File

(NOF) host command.

$CBPNF00(CR)

Beep On Not On File = Disable

$CBPNF01(CR)

DEFAULT

Beep On Not On File = Enable

48 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ACK NAK Options

This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol. 

See page 256 for more information.

$CR2AE00(CR)

DEFAULT

ACK/NAK Protocol = Disable ACK/NAK

$CR2AE01(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission

$CR2AE02(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for host-command acknowledge

$CR2AE03(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge

Product Reference Guide 49

Enter/Exit Programming Mode RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

ACK Character

This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII characters or any hex

value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See page 256

for more information.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option

Data Bits has been set as

7 Data Bits.

$CR2AC

Select ACK Character Setting

DEFAULT 0x06 ‘ACK’ Character

NAK Character

This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

See page 257

for more information.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option

Data Bits

has been set as

7 Data Bits.

$CR2NA

Select NAK Character Setting

DEFAULT 0x15 ‘NAK’ Character

50 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ACK NAK Timeout Value

This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout.

See page 258 for more information on setting this feature.

$CR2AT

Select ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the

Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad

representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT 01 ACK NAK Timeout value is 200ms

ACK NAK Retry Count

This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries. See

page 259

for more information.

$CR2AR

Select ACK NAK Retry Count Setting

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the

Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad

representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT 003 = 3 Retries

Product Reference Guide 51

Enter/Exit Programming Mode RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

ACK NAK Error Handling

This feature specifies the method the reader uses to handle receive errors detected while waiting for an ACK character from the host.

$CR2EH00(CR)

DEFAULT

ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors Detected

$CR2EH01(CR)

ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid ACK

Character

$CR2EH02(CR)

ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as

Valid NAK Character

Indicate Transmission Failure

This option enables/disables the reader’s ability to sound an error beep to indicate a transmission failure while in

ACK/NAK mode.

$CR2TF00(CR)

Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable Indication

$CR2TF01(CR)

Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable Indication

DEFAULT

52 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Disable Character

Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.

ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option

Data Bits

has been set as 7 Data Bits.

See page 260 for more information on setting this feature.

$CR2DC

Select Disable Character Setting

DEFAULT 0x44 = Disable Character is ‘D’

Enable Character

Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.

ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option

Data Bits

has been set as 7 Data Bits.

See page 261 in “References” for more information on setting this feature.

$CR2EC

Select Enable Character Setting

DEFAULT 0x45 = Enable Character is ‘E’

Product Reference Guide 53

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

NOTES

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

54 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

KEYBOARD SETTINGS

C OUNTRY M ODE on page 56

S END C ONTROL C HARACTERS on page 60

W EDGE Q UIET I NTERVAL on page 61

I NTERCODE D ELAY on page 61

C APS L OCK S TATE on page 62

N UMLOCK on page 62

USB K EYBOARD S PEED on page 62

USB K EYBOARD N UMERIC K EYPAD on page 64

Use the programming bar codes in this chapter to select options for USB Keyboard and Wedge Interfaces.

Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults

for a listing of standard factory settings.

Information about control character emulation which applies to keyboard interfaces is listed in Appendix E,

Scancode Tables

.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Keyboard Settings

Country Mode

This feature specifies the country/language supported by the keyboard. Several languages are supported:

DEFAULT

$CKBCO00(CR)

Country Mode = U.S.

$CKBCO01(CR)

Country Mode = Belgium

$CKBCO02(CR)

Country Mode = Britain

$CKBCO11(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Croatia

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

$CKBCO0E(CR)

$CKBCO03(CR)

Country Mode = Czech Republic

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Denmark

56 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Settings

Country Mode (Continued)

$CKBCO04(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Country Mode = France

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

$CKBCO13(CR)

Country Mode = French Canadian

$CKBCO05(CR)

Country Mode = Germany

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

$CKBCO0D(CR)

Country Mode = Hungary

$CKBCO06(CR)

Country Mode = Italy

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

$CKBCO0C(CR)

Country Mode = Japanese 106-key

Product Reference Guide 57

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Country Mode (Continued)

$CKBCO14(CR)

Keyboard Settings

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Lithuanian

$CKBCO07(CR)

Country Mode = Norway

$CKBCO12(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Poland

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

$CKBCO08(CR)

Country Mode = Portugal

$CKBCO10(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Romania

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

$CKBCO0F(CR)

Country Mode = Slovakia

58 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Settings

$CKBCO09(CR)

Country Mode = Spain

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CKBCO0B(CR)

Country Mode = Switzerland

$KBCO0A(CR)

Country Mode = Sweden

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country

Mode feature description.

Product Reference Guide 59

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Keyboard Settings

Send Control Characters

This feature specifies how the reader transmits ASCII control characters to the host. Reference Appendix E,

Scancode Tables for more information about control characters.

Options are as follows:

Control Character 00 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 01 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Shift, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 02 : Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to 0xFE are intended as

an extended ASCII table (see "Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252" on page 327).

$CKBSC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Wedge Send Control Characters = 00

$CKBSC01(CR)

Wedge Send Control Characters = 01

$CKBSC02(CR)

Wedge Send Control Characters = 02

60 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Settings Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wedge Quiet Interval

Specifies amount of time to look for keyboard activity before scanner breaks keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The selectable range for this setting is 00 to 990 milliseconds (00-0x63 by 01) in increments of ten milliseconds.

See

page 262

in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

$CKBQI

Set Wedge Quiet Interval

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the

Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad

representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

0A = Quiet Interval is

100 milliseconds

Intercode Delay

Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds.

See page 264 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

$CKBID

Set Intercode Delay

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the

Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad

representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 00 = No Wedge Intercode Delay

Product Reference Guide 61

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Keyboard Settings

Caps Lock State

This option specifies the format in which the reader sends character data. This does not apply when an alternate key encoding keyboard is selected.

$CKBCL00(CR)

DEFAULT

Caps Lock State = Caps Lock OFF

$CKBCL01(CR)

Caps Lock State = Caps Lock ON

$CKBCL02(CR)

Caps Lock State = AUTO Caps Lock Enable

Numlock

This option specifies the setting of the NUMLOCK key in the Keyboard Wedge interface.

$CKBNL00(CR)

DEFAULT

Numlock = NUMLOCK key unchanged

$CKBNL01(CR)

Numlock = Numlock key toggled

USB Keyboard Speed

This option specifies the USB poll rate for a USB keyboard.

This feature applies ONLY to the USB Keyboard interface.

62 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Settings

DEFAULT

$CKBSP02(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 2ms

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CKBSP01(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 1ms

$CKBSP03(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 3ms

$CKBSP04(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 4ms

$CKBSP05(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 5ms

$CKBSP06(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 6ms

Product Reference Guide 63

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

USB Keyboard Speed — continued

Keyboard Settings

$CKBSP07(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 7ms

$CKBSP08(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 8ms

USB Keyboard Speed = 9ms

$CKBSP0A(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 10ms

USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad

This option Controls whether numeric characters will be sent using standard keys or the numeric keypad.

$CKBKP00(CR)

DEFAULT

Standard Keys

$CKBKP01(CR)

Numeric Keypad

$CKBSP09(CR)

64 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

USB-OEM INTERFACE

USB-OEM D EVICE U SAGE on page 66

I NTERFACE O PTIONS on page 66

Feature settings for USB interfaces differ depending upon which host type the reader will be connected with.

Use the feature settings in this chapter and "IBM 46XX Interface" on page 67 to specifically configure for the

USB-OEM interface. Other USB interfaces are included in the appropriate chapter for their host type.

Reference Appendix B for a listing of standard factory settings.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode USB-OEM Interface

USB-OEM Device Usage

The USB-OEM protocol allows for the reader to be identified as one of two different types of bar code scanners.

Depending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a USB-OEM POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all devices to communicate.

Options are:

• Table Top Scanner

• Handheld Scanner

It may be necessary to switch device usage when connecting two readers/scanners of the same type to a POS system.

$CIBUT00(CR)

USB-OEM Device Usage = Table Top Scanner

DEFAULT

$CIBUT01(CR)

USB-OEM Device Usage = Handheld Scanner

Interface Options

This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.

$CIFO101(CR)

$CIFO102(CR)

Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands

DEFAULT

66 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

IBM 46XX INTERFACE

46 XX N UMBER OF H OST R ESETS on page 68

T RANSMIT L ABELS IN C ODE 39 F ORMAT on page 70

I NTERFACE O PTIONS on page 70

Use the bar codes in this section to configure programmable features for available IBM 46XX interfaces.

Reference

Appendix B for a listing of standard factory settings.

Product Reference Guide 67

Enter/Exit Programming Mode IBM 46XX Interface

46xx Number of Host Resets

Specifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the reader starts a five-second period to allow the user to enter Programming Mode and configure the reader. The configurable range for this feature is 1 to 15 resets.

$CIBHR01(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 1

$CIBHR02(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 2

$CIBHR03(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 3

$CIBHR04(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 4

$CIBHR06(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 6

$CIBHR05(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 5

DEFAULT

$CIBHR07(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 7

68 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

IBM 46XX Interface

46xx Number of Host Resets — cont.

$CIBHR08(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 8

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CIBHR09(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 9

$CIBHR0A(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 10

$CIBHR0B(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 11

$CIBHR0C(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 12

$CIBHR0D(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 13

$CIBHR0E(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 14

$CIBHR0F(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 15

Product Reference Guide 69

Enter/Exit Programming Mode IBM 46XX Interface

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format

This feature enable/disables translation to Code 39 before transmitting label data to an IBM-

46XX or a USB-OEM host. Only the symbology identifier is modified for the translation. The data is not converted to Code 39 or verified to be valid for Code 39.

Options are:

IBM Standard Format: Send labels in standard IBM format.

Code 39 Format: Translate the following symbologies to Code 39:

• USB-OEM: Code128, Code 93, and Codabar

• IBM-Port 5B: Code 128, Code 93, and Codabar

• IBM-Port 9B: Code 93 and Codabar

$CIBC300(CR)

DEFAULT

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format =

IBM Standard Format

$CIBC301(CR)

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = Code 39 Format

Interface Options

This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.

$CIFO101(CR)

Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands

$CIFO102(CR)

Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

DEFAULT

70 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

WAND EMULATION INTERFACE

This feature is valid only for the GBT4400 model.

W AND S IGNAL S PEED on page 72

W AND P OLARITY on page 72

W AND I DLE S TATE on page 73

T RANSMIT N OISE on page 73

L ABEL S YMBOLOGY C ONVERSION on page 74

This chapter provides feature/settings configuration for the Wand Emulation interface.

Reference

Appendix B for a listing of standard factory settings.

Product Reference Guide 71

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Wand Emulation Interface

Wand Signal Speed

This feature specifies the speed of the Wand output signal per nominal bar or space. Choices are:

• 330 microseconds

• 660 microseconds

$CWASP00(CR)

$CWASP01(CR)

Wand Signal Speed = 660ms

Wand Signal Speed = 330ms

DEFAULT

72

$CWAPO01(CR)

Wand Polarity

This option specifies the polarity of the Wand output signal. Choices are:

• Quiet zones and spaces are high, bars are low

• Quiet zones and spaces are low, bars are high

TTL logic levels:

0V <= Low <= 0.7V

2.4V <= High <= 5.25V

$CWAPO00(CR)

DEFAULT

Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces High, Bars Low

Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces Low, Bars High

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Wand Emulation Interface Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wand Idle State

This feature specifies the level of the Wand output signal when the reader is idle.

TTL logic levels:

0V <= Low <= 0.7V

2.4V <= High <= 5.25V

$CWAID01(CR)

$CWAID00(CR)

Wand Idle State = Low

DEFAULT

Wand Idle State = High

$CWATN01(CR)

Transmit Noise

This option specifies the leading/trailing noise for the Wand interface.

$CWATN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Transmit Noise = Disable

Transmit Noise = Transmit leading noise

$CWATN02(CR)

Transmit Noise = Transmit trailing noise

$CWATN03(CR)

Transmit Noise = Transmit leading and trailing noise

Product Reference Guide 73

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Wand Emulation Interface

Label Symbology Conversion

When this feature is enabled for the Wand Emulation interface, all bar code labels are converted to a single symbology.

Options are:

• No conversion

• Convert to Code 39 symbology

• Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII

• Convert to Code 128 symbology

DEFAULT

$CWASC00(CR)

Label Symbology Conversion = No conversion

$CWASC01(CR)

Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 39

$CWASC02(CR)

Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 128

$CWASC03(CR)

Label Symbology Conversion =

Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII

74 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

DATA FORMAT

G LOBAL P REFIX /S UFFIX on page 76

G LOBAL AIM ID on page 77

L ABEL ID starting on page 80

• Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets

• Individually Set Label ID

• Label ID Control

• Label ID Symbology Selection • 1D Symbologies

• Label ID Symbology Selection • 2D Symbologies

C ASE C ONVERSION on page 87

C HARACTER C ONVERSION on page 88

It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.

CAUTION

The features in this chapter can be used to build specific user-defined data into a message string. See “References” starting on

page 266

for more detailed instructions on setting these features.

Product Reference Guide 75

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Global Prefix/Suffix

Global Prefix/Suffix

This option sets up to 20 characters each from the set of ASCII characters or any hex value from

00 to FF. The characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code data, also called a header) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data, also called a footer).

See

page 267

for more detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above to place the unit in Programming Mode, then the “Set Global Prefix” or “Set Global Suffix,”

bar code followed by the digits (in hex) from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D,

Keypad representing your desired character(s). If less than the expected string of 20 characters

are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. Exit programming mode by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CLFPR

Set Global Prefix

$CLFSU

Set Global Suffix

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT No Global Prefix

Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)

CANCEL

76 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Global AIM ID

Global AIM ID

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology types.

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label

identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. See Table 2 on page 3-77 for a listing of

AIM IDs.

AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows:

• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...

• A code character (see some samples in the table below), followed by...

• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).

$CAIEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Global AIM ID = Disable

$CAIEN01(CR)

Global AIM ID = Enable

Table 2

. AIM IDs

Tag Name

ABC CODABAR

ANKER PLESSEY

AZTEC

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE

CODABAR

CODE11

CODE128

CODE32

CODE39

CODE39 CIP

CODE39 DANISH PPT

CODE39 LAPOSTE

CODE39 PZN

CODE93

DATABAR 14

DATABAR 14 COMPOSITE

DATABAR EXPANDED

Product Reference Guide e e e

X

X

X

G

A

X

C

A z

X

F

H

AIM ID code character

X

N

58

58

58

47

65

65

65

43

41

41

58

7A

58

46

48

AIM ID code

ASCII value

58

4E

77

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

DATABAR EXPANDED

COMPOSITE

DATABAR LIMITED

DATABAR LIMITED COMPOSITE

DATA MATRIX

EAN128

EAN128 COMPOSITE

EAN13

EAN13 P2

EAN13 P5

EAN13 COMPOSITE

EAN8

EAN8 P2

EAN8 P5

EAN8 COMPOSITE

FOLLET 2OF5

I2OF5

IATA INDUSTRIAL 2OF5

INDUSTRIAL 2OF5

ISBN

ISBT128 CONCAT

ISSN

MAXICODE

MICRO QR

MICRO PDF

MSI

PDF417

PLESSEY

POSTAL AUSTRALIAN

POSTAL IMB

POSTAL JAPANESE

POSTAL KIX

POSTAL PLANET

POSTAL PORTUGAL

POSTAL POSTNET BB

POSTAL ROYAL MAIL

POSTAL SWEDISH

POSTNET

QR CODE

S25

TRIOPTIC

UPCA

UPCA P2

UPCA P5

UPCA COMPOSITE

UPCE

UPCE P2

UPCE P5

UPCE COMPOSITE

E

E

S

X

X

X

X

Q

X

X

X

X

P

X

X

X

E

E

E

E

E

E

U

Q

L

M

L

X

X

X

X

I

X

E

X

E

E

E

E e e

E

E

E e d

C

C

78

Global AIM ID

53

58

45

45

58

58

58

51

58

58

58

58

50

58

58

58

45

45

45

45

45

45

55

51

4C

4D

4C

58

58

58

58

45

58

49

58

45

45

45

45

65

65

65

64

43

43

45

45

45

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Global AIM ID Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128

This feature configures a Label ID individually for the GS1-128 symbology and the programming for this works the same way as Label ID. See

Label ID: Set Individually Per

Symbology, starting on page 272 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CU8AI00(CR)

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 = Disable

$CU8AI01(CR)

DEFAULT

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 = Enable

Product Reference Guide 79

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID

Label ID

A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (convert to Hex using the

ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual), used to identify a bar code symbology type. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted bar code data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs or

individually per symbology (see "Individually Set Label ID" on page 81). If you wish to

program the reader to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology

types, see the previous feature "Global AIM ID" on page 77.

See

Label ID, starting on page 269

of “References” for more information on setting this feature.

Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets

The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. See

Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets, starting on page 269

for details on the USA set and EU set.

When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults will be lost.

CAUTION

$Ae(CR)

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = EU Set

$AE(CR)

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = USA Set

DEFAULT

80 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Label ID Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Individually Set Label ID

This feature configures a Label ID individually for a single symbology. To set, first define

whether you want it as a prefix or suffix by scanning a label below. Then turn to Label ID

Symbology Selection • 1D Symbologies, starting on page 82

to select the symbology you want to set, followed by up to 3 characters from the ASCII Chart at the back of this manual. See

" Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 272 for detailed instructions on setting this

feature.

Label ID Control

This option controls whether a Label ID is disabled, or sent as a prefix or suffix for a given symbology type.

$CIDCO00(CR)

DEFAULT

Label ID Transmission = Disable

$CIDCO01(CR)

Label ID Transmission = Enable as Prefix

$CIDCO02(CR)

Label ID Transmission = Enable as Suffix

Product Reference Guide 81

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Label ID

Label ID Symbology Selection

1D Symbologies

This option selects the symbology for which a Label ID is to be configured. See "Label ID" on

page 80 or page 272 in “References” for more detailed instructions.

If less than the expected string of 3 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/

EXIT bar code twice to accept the selection and exit Programming Mode.

$CACID $CP3ID

Set ABC Codabar Label ID Character(s)

$CALID

Set Anker Plessey Label ID Character(s)

$CPAID

Set Australian Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CCBID

Set Codabar Label ID Character(s)

$CC1ID

Set Code 11 Label ID Character(s)

$CC8ID

Set Code 128 Label ID Character(s)

$CC3ID

Set Code 32 Pharmacode Label ID Character(s)

$CC9ID

Set Code 93 Label ID Character(s)

$CI8ID

Set Concatenated ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s)

$CDPID

Set Danish PPT Label ID Character(s)

$C3BID

Set EAN 13 Label ID Character(s)

$C3MID

Set EAN 13 Composite Label ID Character(s)

$C32ID

Set Code 39 Label ID Character(s)

Set EAN 13 P2 Label ID Character(s)

82 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Label ID Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)

$CCCID $C35ID

Set Code 39 CIP Label ID Character(s)

$C8BID

Set EAN 8 Label ID Character(s)

$C8MID

Set EAN 13 P5 Label ID Character(s)

$CXCID

Set GS1 DataBar Expanded Composite

Label ID Character(s)

$CU8ID

Set EAN 8 Composite Label ID Character(s)

$C82ID

Set EAN 8 P2 Label ID Character(s)

$C85ID

Set EAN 8 P5 Label ID Character(s)

$CF2ID

Set GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)

$CUMID

Set GS1-128 Composite Label ID Character(s)

$CLBID

Set Follett 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

$C4BID

Set GS1 DataBar 14 Label ID Character(s)

$C4CID

Set GS1 DataBar 14 Composite Label ID Character(s)

Set GSI DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s)

$CLCID

GSI DataBar Limited Composite Label ID Character(s)

$CG2ID

Set GTIN 2 Label ID Character(s)

$CG5ID

Set GTIN 5 Label ID Character(s)

Product Reference Guide 83

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)

$CXBID $CGBID

Set GS1 DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s)

$CIAID

Set IATA Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

$CPMID

Set IMB Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CU2ID

Set Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

$CI2ID

Label ID

Set GTIN 8 Label ID Character(s)

$CLPID

Set LaPoste Code 39 Label ID Character(s)

$CMSID

$CPPID

Set MSI Label ID Character(s)

Set Planet Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CPLID

Set Plessey Label ID Character(s)

$CPGID

Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

$CISID

$CINID

Set ISBN Label ID Character(s)

$CPJID

Set ISSN Label ID Character(s)

Set Japan Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

Set Portugal Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CPNID

Set Postnet Label ID Character(s)

$CPKID

Set Kix Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

84 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Label ID Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)

$CPZID $CPBID

Set PZN Code Label ID Character(s)

$CPRID

Set Royal Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CS2ID

Set Postnet BB Label ID Character(s)

$CAMID

Set UPC-A Composite Label ID Character(s)

$CA2ID

Set Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

$CPSID

Set Swedish Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CCTID

Set Trioptic Code Label ID Character(s)

$CABID

Set UPC-A Label ID Character(s)

Set UPC-A P2 Label ID Character(s)

$CA5ID

Set UPC-A P5 Label ID Character(s)

$CEBID

Set UPC-E Label ID Character(s)

$CE5ID

Set UPC-E P5 Label ID Character(s)

Product Reference Guide 85

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection

2D Symbologies

$CAZID $CMXID

Set Aztec Label ID Character(s)

$CCSID

Set Maxicode Label ID Character(s)

$CP4ID

Label ID

Set China Sensible Label ID Character(s)

$CCFID

Set Codablock F Label ID Character(s)

$CDMID

Set Data Matrix Label ID Character(s)

$CMQID

Set Micro QR Label ID Character(s)

Set PDF 417 Label ID Character(s)

$CMIID

Set Micro PDF 417 Label ID Character(s)

$CQRID

Set QR Code Label ID Character(s)

86 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Label ID

$CLFCA01(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Advanced Formatting: User Label Edit

Advanced formatting is available to create user label edit scripts. See the Datalogic Aladdin configuration application or contact Technical Support.

Case Conversion

This feature allows conversion of the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.

Case conversion affects ONLY scanned bar code data, and does not affect Label

ID, Prefix, Suffix, or other appended data.

$CLFCA00(CR)

DEFAULT

Case Conversion = Disable (no case conversion)

Case Conversion = Convert to upper case

$CLFCA02(CR)

Case Conversion = Convert to lower case

Product Reference Guide 87

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Label ID

Character Conversion

Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.

If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/

EXIT bar code twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.

$CLFCH

DEFAULT

Configure Character Conversion

0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

(No character conversion)

88 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

READING PARAMETERS

D OUBLE R EAD T IMEOUT on page 90

S CANNING A CTIVE T IME on page 101

LED AND B EEPER I NDICATORS on page 92

S TAND I LLUMINATION C ONTROL on page 102

P OWER O N A LERT on page 92

F LASH O N T IME on page 103

G OOD R EAD : W HEN TO I NDICATE on page 92

F LASH O FF T IME on page 103

G OOD R EAD B EEP T YPE on page 93

A IMING P OINTER on page 104

G OOD R EAD B EEP F REQUENCY on page 93

A IMING D URATION T IMER on page 104

G OOD R EAD B EEP L ENGTH on page 94

G REEN S POT D URATION on page 105

G OOD R EAD B EEP V OLUME on page 95

G OOD R EAD LED D URATION on page 96

S CAN M ODE on page 97

S TAND M ODE I NDICATION on page 98

I

M

P

D

OBILE

ARTIAL

ECODE

MAGE C

P

L

N

HONE

ABEL

APTURE

M

R

EGATIVE

ODE

I

on page 105

EADING C

MAGE

ONTROL on page 106

on page 106

on page 107

S

P

TAND

ICK M

O PERATION

ODE

on page 99

on page 100

S TAND M ODE S ENSITIVITY on page 100

S TAND M ODE I LLUMINATION O FF T IME on page 101

M ULTIPLE L ABELS PER F RAME on page 107

M ULTIPLE L ABELS O RDERING BY C ODE S YM -

BOLOGY on page 108

M ULTIPLE L ABELS O RDERING BY C ODE L ENGTH on page 108

Product Reference Guide 89

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Reading Parameters

Double Read Timeout

Double Read Timeout prevents a double read of the same label by setting the minimum time allowed between reads of labels of the same symbology and data. If the unit reads a label and sees the same label again within the specified timeout, the second read is ignored. Double Read

Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull for each label read.

$CSNDR0A(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.1 Second

$CSNDR14(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.2 Second

$CSNDR1E(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.3 Second

$CSNDR28(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.4 Second

$CSNDR32(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.5 Second

$CSNDR3C(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.6 Second

DEFAULT

90

$CSNDR46(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.7 Second

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Double Read Timeout — continued

$CSNDR50(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.8 Second

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CSNDR5A(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.9 Second

$CSNDR64(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 1 Second

Product Reference Guide 91

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS

Reading Parameters

Power On Alert

Disables or enables the indication (from the Beeper) that the reader is receiving power.

$CBPPU00(CR)

Power On Alert = Disable (No Audible Indication)

$CBPPU01(CR)

Power On Alert = Power-up Beep

DEFAULT

Good Read: When to Indicate

This feature specifies when the reader will provide indication (beep and/or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code.

$CBPIN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Indicate Good Read = After Decode

$CBPIN01(CR)

Indicate Good Read = After Transmit

$CBPIN02(CR)

Indicate Good Read =

After CTS goes inactive then active

92 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read Beep Type

Specifies whether the good read beep has a mono or bitonal beep sound.

$CBPTY00(CR)

DEFAULT

Good Read Beep Type = Mono

$CBPTY01(CR)

Good Read Beep Type = Bitonal

Good Read Beep Frequency

Adjusts the good read beep to sound at a selectable low, medium or high frequency, selectable from the list below. (Controls the beeper’s pitch/tone.)

$CBPFR00(CR)

Good Read Beep Frequency = Low

$CBPFR01(CR)

Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium

DEFAULT

$CBPFR02(CR)

Good Read Beep Frequency = High

Product Reference Guide 93

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read Beep Length

$CBPLE08(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 80 msec

Reading Parameters

$CBPLE06(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 60 msec

DEFAULT

$CBPLE0A(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 100 msec

$CBPLE0C(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 120 msec

$CBPLE0E(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 140 msec

$CBPLE10(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 160 msec

$CBPLE12(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 180 msec

$CBPLE14(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 200 msec

94 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read Beep Volume

Selects the beeper volume (loudness) upon a good read beep. There are three selectable volume levels.

$CBPVO00CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Beeper Off

$CBPVO01CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Low

$CBPVO02CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Medium

$CBPVO03CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = High

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide 95

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Reading Parameters

Good Read LED Duration

This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 100 milliseconds to 25,500 milliseconds (0.1 to 25.5 seconds) in 100ms increments. A setting of 00 keeps the LED on until the next trigger pull.

See

page 276

in “References” for detailed instructions and examples for setting this feature.

$CLAGL00(CR)

$CLAGL

Select Good Read LED Duration Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Good Read LED Duration Setting =

Keep LED on until next trigger pull

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

003 = Good Read LED stays on for 300 ms.

Indicators are dimmed during sleep.

96 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters Enter/Exit Programming Mode

SCANNING FEATURES

Scan Mode

Selects the reader’s scan operating mode. See

page 277

in “References” for descriptions.

$CSNRM00(CR)

DEFAULT

Scan Mode = Trigger Single

$CSNRM01(CR)

Scan Mode = Trigger Hold Multiple

$CSNRM

Scan Mode = Trigger Pulse Multiple

$CSNRM03(CR

Scan Mode = Flashing

$CSNRM04(CR)

Scan Mode = Always On

$CSNRM05(CR

Scan Mode = Stand Mode

Options concerning Stand Mode behavior are available at the following feature,

Stand Operation

.

Product Reference Guide 97

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Reading Parameters

Stand Mode Indication

This operation is useful for indicating when the reader is in Stand Mode. If enabled, the blue indicator will blink when Stand Mode scanning is active. If reader detects motion (or removed from base station for cordless models) and switches out of Stand Mode into Triggered Mode, blinking will stop until Stand Mode is active again.

$CSMFL00(CR)

DEFAULT

Stand Mode Indication = Disable

$CSMFL01(CR)

Stand Mode Indication = Enable

98 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Stand Operation

Specifies the behavior of the reader when stationary in a stand.

There are two conditions which cause the reader to switch to Stand Mode:

1. The reader is configured to switch to Stand Mode when stationary.

2. The reader is placed into the cradle of the base station.

Below are further options concerning Stand Operation.

Ignore Autorecognition. Disables mode switching when the reader is placed in a stand.

Switch to Stand Mode. Automatically switches the reader to Stand Mode when the reader is placed in the stand.

Switch to Flashing. Automatically switches the reader to Flash Mode when the reader is placed in the stand.

Switch to Always On. Automatically switches the reader to Always On mode when the reader is placed in the stand .

$CSMSD00(

CR)

Do Not Change Mode

$CSMSD01(

CR)

Change to Stand Mode

DEFAULT

$CSMSD02(CR)

Change to Always On

$CSMSD03(CR)

Change to Flashing

Product Reference Guide 99

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Reading Parameters

Pick Mode

Specifies the ability of the reader to decode labels only when they are close to the center of the aiming pattern. This allows the reader to accurately target labels when they are placed close together, such as on a pick sheet.

This feature is not compatible with Multiple Labels Reading in a Volume.

$CSNPM00(CR)

DEFAULT

Pick Mode = Disable

$CSNPM01(CR)

Pick Mode = Enable

$CSMSE01(CR)

Stand Mode Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity level for stand mode wakeup. Choices are low, medium and high.

$CSMSE00(CR)

Stand Mode Sensitivity = Low

DEFAULT

Stand Mode Sensitivity = Medium

$CSMSE02(CR)

Stand Mode Sensitivity = High

100 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Stand Mode Illumination Off Time

Specifies the amount of time reader illumination stays off after pulling the trigger when in Stand

Mode. The configurable range is 01 to 32 by 01 in increments of 500ms (500ms to 16 seconds).

See

page 278

in “References” for a description of this feature.

$CSNTM

Select Stand Mode Time Setting

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

04 = 2 Seconds

DEFAULT

Scanning Active Time

This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. See

page 279

in “References” for further description of this feature.

$CSNET03(CR)

Scanning Active Time = 3 seconds

$CSNET05(CR)

Scanning Active Time = 5 seconds

DEFAULT

$CSNET08(CR)

Scanning Active Time = 8 seconds

Product Reference Guide 101

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Reading Parameters

Stand Illumination Control

Controls the illumination status while the reading mode is stand mode and the reader is attempting to detect objects.

$CSMIL00(CR)

DEFAULT

Stand Illumination Control = OFF

$CSMIL01(CR)

Stand Illumination Control = ON

$CSMIL02(CR)

Stand Illumination Control = Dim

Motion Still Timeout

Motion Still Timeout specifies the waiting time after which no motions is detected. When no motion is detected for period of time longer than the set Motion Still Timeout period, the scanner assumes it is in a motionless condition. The selectable setting are from 500 to 25,500 milliseconds in 100 millisecond increments. The default is 2 seconds. This option relates to such features and the Aimer On timing and Stand Mode Object Sense scanning with respect to motion. See

page 288 in "References" for detailed information on setting this feature.

$CMOTO/r

Select Motion Still Timeout Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

14 = Motion Still Timeout for 2 seconds

DEFAULT

102 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Flash On Time

This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See

page 281

in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.

$CSNFN

Select Flash ON Time Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

10 = Flash is ON for 1 Second

DEFAULT

Flash Off Time

This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See

page 282

in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.

$CSNFF

Select Flash OFF Time Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 06 = Flash is OFF for 600ms

Product Reference Guide 103

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Aiming Pointer

Enables/disables the aiming pointer for all symbologies.

$CTAAP00(CR)

$CTAAP01(CR)

Aiming Pointer = Enable

Reading Parameters

Aiming Pointer = Disable

DEFAULT

Aiming Duration Timer

Specifies the frame of time the aiming pointer remains on after decoding a label, when in trigger single mode.The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. See

page 280

in “References” for a description of this feature.

LSTM00

DEFAULT

LSTM

Set Aiming Duration Timer

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Aiming Off After Decoding

To configure, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING

MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters

in Appendix D, Keypad

representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code.

~

CANCEL

104 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Green Spot Duration

Specifies the duration of the good read pointer beam after a good read.

$CLSSP00(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Disable (Green Spot is Off )

$CLSSP01(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Short (300 msec)

DEFAULT

$CLSSP02(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Medium (500 msec)

$CLSSP03(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Long (800 msec)

Mobile Phone Mode

This mode is useful for scanning bar codes displayed on a mobile phone. Other options for this feature can be configured using the Datalogic Aladdin application.

$CSNPE00(CR)

$CSNPE01(CR)

Mobile Phone Mode = Enable

Mobile Phone Mode = Disable

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide 105

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Reading Parameters

Partial Label Reading Control

Enable/Disable the option to ignore partial labels to be read within the boundary of the field of view.

IPPL00

Partial Label Reading Control = Disable

IPPL01

Partial Label Reading Control = Enable

Decode Negative Image

Enable/Disable the ability to decode a negative image for all symbologies. When this feature is enabled, you will be unable to read normally-printed labels or programming labels in this manual. Scan the “Disable” bar code below to return the scanner to its default for this feature.

To set the reader to decode only 2D codes, go to 2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control" on page

203

.

For additional options, see the Aladdin configuration application.

Unlike some programming features and options, Decode Negative Image selections require that you scan only one programming bar code label. DO NOT scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code prior to scanning a Decode Negative Image bar code.

CAUTION

When this feature is enabled, you will be unable to read other programming labels in this manual.

$P,CIPVR00,P(C

R)

DEFAULT

Decode Negative Image = Disable

106

$P,CIPVR01,P(CR)

Decode Negative Image = Enable

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Image Capture

For information and a list of options for Image Capture, use the Datalogic Aladdin configuration application, available for free download from the Datalogic Scanning website.

MULTIPLE LABEL READING

In standard (default) mode, when the reader’s aiming system is activated (by a trigger pull, motion or other method depending on the mode), it then acquires and processes each image in the area in front of it (the Volume). In this case, the scanner stops processing the image once it decodes a label. If several labels are present in the volume, only the first label encountered is decoded and sent.

When Multiple Reading Mode is enabled, the scanner keeps on processing the image until all the labels present are decoded. The reader then sorts the data from all the bar codes (if configured to do so) before transmitting it.

Multiple Labels per Frame

Specifies the ability of the reader to decode and transmit a set of code labels in a specific volume and in a single frame of time. When in Multiple Labels per Frame the reader beeps and turns on the good read LED indication for each code read in a frame.

When Multiple Labels Mode is enabled, ISBT pairing, ABC Codabar pairing, and composites are not allowed.

$CSNML00(CR)

DEFAULT

Multiple Labels per Frame = Disable

$CSNML01(CR)

Multiple Labels per Frame = Enable

Product Reference Guide 107

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Reading Parameters

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology

This feature allows you to specify the order multiple labels are transmitted by symbology type,

when Multiple Labels per Frame is enabled. See page 283

in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.

$CSNMS

Select Symbologies for Multiple Labels Ordering

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits From the alphanumeric characters In Appendix d, keypad representing your desired Character(s). end by scanning the enter/exit bar code again.

~

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

000000000000 = Random order

DEFAULT

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length

Specifies the transmission ordering by code length, when Multiple Labels per Frame is enabled.

$CSNMT00(CR)

DEFAULT

Multiple Labels Ordering = Disable

$CSNMT01(CR) $CSNMT02(CR)

Transmit Increasing Length Order Transmit Decreasing Length Order

108 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

1D SYMBOLOGIES

1D Code Selection

The reader supports the following 1D symbologies (bar code types). See

"2D Symbologies" starting on page 201

for 2D bar codes. Symbology-dependent options are included in each chapter.

Disable All Symbologies, page 110

Code EAN/UPC, page 111

UPC-E, page 114

GTIN Formatting, page 117

EAN 13 (Jan 13), page 118

ISSN, page 120

EAN 8 (Jan 8), page 121

GS1-128, page 148

Code ISBT 128, page 149

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5), page 152

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR, page 157

Follett 2 of 5, page 157

Standard 2 of 5, page 158

Industrial 2 of 5, page 162

UPC/EAN Global Settings, page 123

Add-Ons, page 125

Code 39, page 132

Trioptic Code, page 138

Code IATA, page 166

Codabar, page 167

ABC Codabar, page 173

Code 11, page 176

Code 32 (Ital Pharmaceutical Code), page 138

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional, page 180

Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical), page 140

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded, page 181

Code 39 Danish PPT, page 140

Code 39 LaPoste, page 141

GS1 DataBar™ Limited, page 186

Code 93, page 187

Code 39 PZN, page 141

Code 128, page 142

MSI, page 192

Plessey, page 197

Default settings are indicated at each feature/option with a green arrow. Also reference

Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of the most widely used set of standard factory

settings. That section also provides space to record any custom settings needed or implemented for your system.

To set most features:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code at the top of applicable programming pages.

2. Scan the correct bar code to set the desired programming feature or parameter. You may need to cover unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to

Appendix D, Keypad , and scan the

appropriate characters from the keypad.

Additional information about many features can be found in the “References” chapter.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAM-

MING bar code to exit Programming Mode.

Product Reference Guide 109

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Disable All Symbologies

DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES

Use this feature to disable all symbologies.

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING Mode bar code.

2. Scan the Disable All Symbologies bar code.

3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAM-

MING bar code.

$AD(CR)

Disable All Symbologies

This does not disable the reading of programming labels.

110 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code EAN/UPC Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE EAN/UPC

Coupon Control

This feature is used to control the reader’s method of processing coupon labels.

$CCPLC00(CR)

$CCPLC01(CR)

Coupon Control = Enable only UPCA coupon decoding

Coupon Control = Allow all coupon bar codes to be decoded

DEFAULT

$CCPLC02(CR)

Coupon Control = Enable only GS1 DataBar™

coupon decoding

Product Reference Guide 111

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-A

The following options apply to the UPC-A symbology.

UPC-A Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-A bar codes.

$CABEN00(CR)

$CABEN01(CR)

UPC-A = Disable

DEFAULT

Code EAN/UPC

UPC-A = Enable

UPC-A Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-A bar code data.

$CABCT00(CR)

$CABCT01(CR)

UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Send

UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

DEFAULT

112 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code EAN/UPC Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13

Expands UPC-A data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

DEFAULT

$CAB3B00(CR)

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand

$CAB3B01(CR)

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Expand

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-A number system character.

$CABNS01(CR)

UPC-A Number System Character = Transmit

$CABNS00(CR)

UPC-A Number System Character = Do not transmit

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide 113

Enter/Exit Programming Mode UPC-E

UPC-A 2D Component

This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$CAB2D00(CR)

DEFAULT

EAN-13 2D Component =

Disable (2D component not required)

$CAB2D01(CR)

EAN-13 2D Component =

2D component must be decoded

UPC-E

The following options apply to the UPC-E symbology.

UPC-E Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-E bar codes.

$CEBEN00(CR)

$CEBEN01(CR)

UPC-E = Disable

DEFAULT

UPC-E = Enable

114 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

UPC-E

$CEBCT01(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-E Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-E bar code data.

$CEBCT00(CR)

UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

DEFAULT

UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Send

$CEB2D01(CR)

UPC-E 2D Component

This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label for this symbology is decoded.

$CEB2D00(CR)

DEFAULT

UPC-E 2D Component =

Disable (2D component not required)

UPC-E 2D Component =

2D component must be decoded

Product Reference Guide 115

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13

Expands UPC-E data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

UPC-E

$CEB3B00(CR)

DEFAULT

UPC-E to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand

$CEB3B01(CR)

UPC-E to EAN-13 = Expand

$CEBAB01(CR)

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

Expands UPC-E data to the UPC-A data format.

$CEBAB00(CR)

DEFAULT

UPC-E to UPC-A = Don’t Expand

UPC-E to UPC-A = Expand

116 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GTIN Formatting Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-E system number character.

$CEBNS00(CR)

UPC-E Number System Character = Do not transmit

$CEBNS01(CR)

DEFAULT

UPC-E Number System Character = Transmit

GTIN FORMATTING

This feature enables/disables the ability to convert UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN 8, and EAN 13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format.

If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted GTIN label.

DEFAULT

$CGBEN01(CR)

GTIN Formatting = Enable

$CGBEN00(CR)

GTIN Formatting = Disable

Product Reference Guide 117

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN 13 (JAN 13)

The following options apply to the EAN 13 (Jan 13) symbology.

EAN 13 Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 13/JAN 13 bar codes.

EAN 13 (Jan 13)

$C3BEN00(CR)

$C3BEN01(CR)

EAN 13 = Disable

DEFAULT

EAN 13 = Enable

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 13 bar code data.

$C3BCT00(CR)

$C3BCT01(CR)

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Send

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

DEFAULT

118 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

EAN 13 (Jan 13) Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character

Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN13 Flag1 character. The Flag 1 character is the first character of the label.

$C3BF100(CR)

$C3BF101(CR)

EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Transmit

EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Don’t transmit

DEFAULT

$C3BIS01(CR)

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion

This option enables/disables conversion of EAN 13/JAN 13 Bookland labels starting with 978 to ISBN labels.

$C3BIS00(CR)

DEFAULT

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Convert to ISBN

Product Reference Guide 119

Enter/Exit Programming Mode ISSN

EAN-13 2D Component

This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$C3B2D00(CR)

DEFAULT

EAN-13 2D Component =

Disable (2D component not required)

$C3B2D01(CR)

EAN-13 2D Component =

2D component must be decoded

$C3BIN01(CR)

ISSN

The following options apply to the ISSN symbology.

ISSN Enable/Disable

Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN13 Bookland labels starting with 977 to ISSN labels.

$C3BIN00(CR)

DEFAULT

ISSN = Disable

ISSN = Enable

120 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

EAN 8 (Jan 8) Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN 8 (JAN 8)

The following options apply to the EAN 8 (Jan 8) symbology.

EAN 8 Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 8/JAN 8 bar codes.

$C8BEN00(CR)

$C8BEN01(CR)

EAN 8 = Disable

DEFAULT

EAN 8 = Enable

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 8 bar code data.

$C8BCT00(CR)

$C8BCT01(CR)

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Send

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide 121

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13

Enable this option to expand EAN 8/JAN 8 labels to EAN 13/JAN 13.

$C8B3B00(CR)

DEFAULT

EAN 8 (Jan 8)

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Disable

$C8B3B01(CR)

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Enable

$C8B2D01(CR)

EAN 8 2D Component

This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label for this symbology is decoded.

$C8B2D00(CR)

DEFAULT

EAN 8 2D Component =

Disable (2D component not required)

EAN 8 2D Component =

2D component must be decoded

122 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

UPC/EAN Global Settings Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS

This section provides configuration settings for UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN 13 and EAN 8 symbologies, and affects all of these unless otherwise marked for each feature description.

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check

This feature enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.

$CPWEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Price Weight Check = Disabled

$CPWEN01(CR)

Price Weight Check = 4-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN02(CR)

Price Weight Check = 5-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN03(CR)

Price Weight Check = European 4-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN04(CR)

Price Weight Check = European 5-digit price-weight check

Product Reference Guide 123

Enter/Exit Programming Mode UPC/EAN Global Settings

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones

This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for UPC/EAN labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a bar code, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label. The property applies to all EAN-UPC symbologies globally and to the ADDONs.

$CUNLO02(CR)

DEFAULT

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones = Two Modules

$CUNLO03(CR)

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones = Three Modules

124 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Add-Ons

$CADO201(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ADD-ONS

Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional and conditional add-ons.

Optional Add-ons

The reader can be enabled to optionally read the following add-ons (supplementals):

If a UPC/EAN base label and an add-on are both decoded, the reader will transmit the base label and add-on. If a UPC/EAN base label is decoded without an add-on, the base label will be transmitted without an add-on.

Conditional add-on settings (if enabled) are considered by the reader before optional add-on settings.

$CADO200(CR)

DEFAULT

Optional Add-Ons = Disable P2

Optional Add-Ons = Enable P2

DEFAULT

$CADO500(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Disable P5

$CADO501(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Enable P5

DEFAULT

$CADO800(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Disable GS1-128

$CADO801(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Enable GS1-128

Product Reference Guide 125

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Add-Ons

Optional Add-On Timer

This option sets the time the reader will look for an add-on when an add-on fragment has been

seen and optional add-ons are enabled. (Also see "Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer" on page 129.)

$CADOT01(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 10ms

$CADOT02(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 20ms

$CADOT03(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 30ms

$CADOT04(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 40ms

$CADOT05(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 50ms

126 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Add-Ons

Optional Add-On Timer — cont.

$CADOT07(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 70ms

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CADOT06(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 60ms

DEFAULT

$CADOT0A(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 100ms

$CADOT0C(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 120ms

$CADOT0E(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 140ms

$CADOT10(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 160ms

Product Reference Guide 127

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional Add-On Timer — cont.

$CADOT12(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 180ms

Add-Ons

$CADOT14(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 200ms

$CADOT16(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 220ms

$CADOT18(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 240ms

$CADOT1A(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 260ms

$CADOT1C(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 280ms

$CADOT1E(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 300ms

128 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Add-Ons

$CADUT01(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer

This option sets the timer expiration value to read the added part after reading the linear EAN/

UPC part. For UPC/EAN add-ons other than those of that type, see "Optional Add-On

Timer" on page 126.

$CADUT00(CR)

DEFAULT

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = Disable

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 10ms

$CADUT02(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 20ms

$CADUT03(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 30ms

$CADUT04(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 40ms

$CADUT05(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 50ms

Product Reference Guide 129

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.

$CADUT06(CR)

Add-Ons

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 60ms

$CADUT07(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 70ms

$CADUT0A(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 100ms

$CADUT0C(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 120ms

$CADUT0E(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 140ms

$CADUT10(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 160ms

130 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Add-Ons

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.

$CADUT12(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 180ms

$CADUT14(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 200ms

$CADUT16(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 220ms

$CADUT18(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 240ms

$CADUT1A(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 260ms

$CADUT1C(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 280ms

$CADUT1E(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 300ms

Product Reference Guide 131

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 39

The following options apply to the Code 39 symbology.

Code 39 Enable/Disable

$CC3EN00(CR)

Code 39

$CC3EN01(CR)

Code 39 = Disable

DEFAULT

Code 39 = Enable

$CC3CC01(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation

Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character

$CC3CC00(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate

DEFAULT

Code 39 Check Character Calculation =

Calculate Std Check

$CC3CC02(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation =

Calculate Mod 7 Check

132 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 39

Code 39 Check Character Calculation — cont.

$CC3CC04(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation =

Enable Italian Post Check

$CC3CC08(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Check Character Calculation =

Enable Daimler Chrysler Check

Code 39 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 39 bar code data.

$CC3CT00(CR)

$CC3CT01(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide 133

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission

Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.

Code 39

$CC3SS00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission =

Don’t Transmit

$CC3SS01(CR)

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Code 39 Full ASCII

Enables/disables the translation of Code 39 characters to Code 39 full-ASCII characters.

DEFAULT

$CC3FA01(CR)

Code 39 Full ASCII = Enable

$CC3FA00(CR)

Code 39 Full ASCII = Disable

134 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 39

$CC3LO03(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Quiet Zones

This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 39 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a bar code, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.

$CC3LO02(CR)

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

DEFAULT

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

$CC3LC01(CR)

Code 39 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 39 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC3LC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 39 Length Control = Variable Length

Code 39 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 135

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Code 39

Code 39 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Code 39 Length Control . Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length

Mode, or the first fixed length if in

Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 0 to 50 characters.

Table 3

provides examples for setting Length 1. See page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 3. Code 39 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

00 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CC3L1

Select Code 39 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

02 = Length 1 is 2 Characters

136 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 39 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Code 39 Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in

Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.

Table 4

provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 4. Code 39 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

00 (Ignore This

Length)

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING .MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CC3L2

Select Code 39 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 137

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

TRIOPTIC CODE

The following options apply to the Trioptic symbology.

Trioptic Code Enable/Disable

$CCTEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Trioptic Code = Disable

Trioptic Code

$CCTEN01(CR)

Trioptic Code = Enable

CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE)

The following options apply to the Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code) symbology.

Code 32 Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Code 32 bar codes.

DEFAULT

$CP3EN01(CR)

Code 32 = Enable

$CP3EN00(CR)

Code 32 = Disable

138 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 32 (Ital Pharmaceutical Code) Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions

The following features are set for Code 32 by using these Code 39 settings:

"Code 39 Quiet Zones" on page 135

"Code 39 Length Control" on page 135

"Trioptic Code" on page 138

Code 32 Check Char Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 32 bar code data.

$CP3CT00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CP3CT01(CR)

Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Send

$CP3SS01(CR)

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission

This option enables/disables transmission of Code 32 start and stop characters.

$CP3SS00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t

Transmit

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Product Reference Guide 139

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical)

CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL)

The following options apply to the Code 39 CIP symbology.

Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of the reader to decode Code 39 CIP labels.

DEFAULT

$CCCEN00(CR)

Code 39 CIP = Disable

$CCCEN01(CR)

Code 39 CIP = Enable

CODE 39 DANISH PPT

The following options apply to the Code 39 Danish PPT symbology.

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables AIM ID for Code 39 Danish PPT Codes.

DEFAULT

$CDPEN01(CR)

Code 39 Danish PPT = Enable

$CDPEN00(CR)

Code 39 Danish PPT = Disable

140 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 39 LaPoste Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 39 LAPOSTE

The following options apply to the Code 39 LaPoste symbology.

Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code39 La Poste labels.

DEFAULT

$CLPEN01(CR)

Code 39 LaPoste = Enable

$CLPEN00(CR)

Code 39 LaPoste = Disable

CODE 39 PZN

The following options apply to the Code 39 PZN symbology.

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code39 PZN labels.

DEFAULT

$PZEN01(CR)

Code 39 PZN = Enable

$PZEN00(CR)

Code 39 PZN = Disable

Product Reference Guide 141

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 128

The following options apply to the Code 128 symbology.

Code 128 Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Code 128 bar codes.

$CC8EN01(CR)

Code 128 = Enable

$CC8EN00(CR)

Code 128 = Disable

DEFAULT

Code 128

Expand Code 128 to Code 39

This feature enables/disables expansion of Code 128 labels to Code 39 labels.

DEFAULT

$CC8C301(CR)

Code 128 to Code 39 = Expand

$CC8C300(CR)

Code 128 to Code 39 = Don’t Expand

142 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 128

$CC8CT01(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 128 bar code data.

$CC8CT00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Send

$CC8TF01(CR)

Code 128 Function Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of Code128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.

$CC8TF00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Don’t Send

Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Send

Product Reference Guide 143

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Code 128

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission

Enables/disables the transmission of “Sub-Code Exchange” characters (NOT transmitted by standard decoding).

$CC8SC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission = Disable

$CC8SC01(CR)

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission = Enable

Code 128 Quiet Zones

This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 128 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.

$CC8LO02(CR)

$CC8LO03(CR)

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

DEFAULT

144 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 128

$CC8LC01(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 128

symbology. See page 265

for more information.

$CC8LC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 128 Length Control = Variable Length

Code 128 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 145

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Code 128

Code 128 Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Code 128 Length Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in

Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.

Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters.

Table 5

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 5. Code 128 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

01 Character 07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

80 Characters

‘8’ AND ‘0’

$CC8L1

Select Code 128 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

146 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 128 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 128 Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in

Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only.

The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 6

provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 6. Code 128 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

00 (Ignore This

Length)

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

.

80 Characters

‘8’ and 0’

$CC8L2

Select Code 128 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 80 = Length 2 is 80 Characters

Product Reference Guide 147

Enter/Exit Programming Mode GS1-128

GS1-128

The following options apply to the GS1-128 symbology. (Also known as USS-128, GS1-128,

GTIN-128, UCC-128, EAN-128.)

GS1-128 Enable

This option enables/disables the ability of the reader to translate GS1-128 labels to the GS1-128 data format. Options are:

• Transmit GS1-128 labels in Code 128 data format.

• Transmit GS1-128 labels in GS1-128 data format.

• Do not transmit GS1-128 labels.

$CU8EN00CR)

148

$CU8EN01CR)

GS1-128 = Transmit in GS1-128 data format

GS1-128 = Transmit in Code 128 data format

DEFAULT

$CU8EN02CR)

GS1-128 = Do not transmit GS1-128 labels

$CU82D01(CR)

GS1-128 2D Component

This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$CU82D00(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1-128 2D Component = Disable

GS1-128 2D Component = Enable

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code ISBT 128 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE ISBT 128

The following options apply to the ISBT 128 symbology.

ISBT 128 Concatenation

Use this option to enable/disable ISBT128 concatenation of 2 labels.

$CI8CE00(CR)

DEFAULT

ISBN 128 Concatenation = Disable

$CI8CE01(CR)

ISBN 128 Concatenation = Enable

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation

When enabled, this feature forces concatenation for ISBT.

This option is only valid when

ISBT 128 Concatenation

is enabled.

DEFAULT

$CI8FC01(CR)

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Enable

$CI8FC00(CR)

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Disable

Product Reference Guide 149

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode

Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.

Code ISBT 128

This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled (see " ISBT 128 Concatenation" on page 149 ).

DEFAULT

$CI8CM01CR)

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

$CI8CM00CR)

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Static

150 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code ISBT 128 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout

Specifies the timeout used by the ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Mode.

$CI8DT05(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec

$CI8DT0A(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec

DEFAULT

$CI8DT14(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec

$CI8DT32(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec

$CI8DT4B(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec

$CI8DT64(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 second

ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options

To set up pairs of label types for concatenation, use the Datalogic Aladdin configuration application or contact Datalogic Technical Support, as described on

page 10

.

Product Reference Guide 151

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5)

The following options apply to the I 2 of 5 symbology.

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read I 2 of 5 bar codes.

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

$CI2EN00(CR)

DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 = Disable

$CI2EN01(CR)

I 2 of 5 = Enable

152 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enter/Exit Programming Mode

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional I 2 of 5 check character.

Combinations of these settings are possible via the Aladdin configuration utility, or contact

Technical Support.

$CI2CC00(CR)

DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CI2CC01(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Standard

(Modulo 10)

$CI2CC02(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check German Parcel

$CI2CC04(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check DHL

$CI2CC08(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Daimler Chrysler

$CI2CC10(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Bosch

Product Reference Guide

$CI2CC20(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Italian Post

153

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with I 2 of 5 bar code data.

$CI2CT00(CR)

$CI2CT01(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

DEFAULT

$CI2LC01(CR)

I 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the I 2 of 5 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CI2LC00(CR)

DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

I 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

154 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enter/Exit Programming Mode

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

I 2 of 5 Length Control . Length 1 is the

minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from

2 to 50 characters in increments of two.

Table 7

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 7. I 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

ACTION

Desired Setting

Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits

3

4

5

6

2 Characters

02

6 Characters

06

EXAMPLES

14 Characters

14

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘6’ ‘1’ and ‘4’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

50

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CI2L1

Select I 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters

Product Reference Guide 155

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

I 2 of 5 Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in

Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data characters.

The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 8

provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 8. I 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting

Ignore This

Length

4 Characters 14 Characters

Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits

00 04 14

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT I 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘4’ ‘1’ and ‘4’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

50

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CI2L2

Select I 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

156 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enter/Exit Programming Mode

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR

The following options apply to the Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR symbology.

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR labels.

DEFAULT

$CCHEN01(CR)

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Enable

$CCHEN00(CR)

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Disable

$CF2EN01(CR)

FOLLETT 2 OF 5

The following options apply to the Follett 2 of 5 symbology.

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.

$CF2EN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Follett 2 of 5 = Disable

Follett 2 of 5 = Enable

Product Reference Guide 157

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

STANDARD 2 OF 5

The following options apply to the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Standard 2 of 5 bar codes.

Standard 2 of 5

DEFAULT

$C2SEN00(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 = Disable

$C2SEN01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 = Enable

$CS2CC01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.

$CS2CC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

158 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Standard 2 of 5 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.

$CS2CT00(CR)

$CS2CT01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t

Send

DEFAULT

$CS2LC01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CS2LC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 159

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Standard 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in

Fixed

Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set

from 1 to 50 characters.

Table 9

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265

if you want detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 9. Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

01 Character 07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CS2L1

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

08 = Length 1 is 8 Characters

160 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Standard 2 of 5 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length

Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters.

The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 10 provides examples for setting Length 2. See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 10. Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes)

00 (Ignore This

Length)

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CS2L2

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 161

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5

The following options apply to the Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Industrial 2 of 5 labels.

$CU2EN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Industrial 2 of 5

Industrial 2 of 5 = Disable

$CU2EN01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 = Enable

$CU2CC01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CU2CC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

162 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Industrial 2 of 5 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CU2CT00(CR)

$CU2CT01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Disable

DEFAULT

$CU2LC01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Industrial

2 of 5 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CU2LC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

Industrial 2 of 5 = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 163

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

Industrial 2 of 5

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control . Length 1

is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 0

to 50 characters.

Table 11 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See

page 265

if you want detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 11. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

00 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CU2L1

Select Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

164 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Industrial 2 of 5

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control . Length 2

is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The

length does not include start/stop characters.

The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 12 provides examples for setting Length 2. See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 12. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

EXAMPLES

00 (Ignore This

Length)

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CU2L2

Select Industrial 2 of5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 165

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE IATA

The following options apply to the IATA symbology.

IATA Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables the ability of the reader to decode IATA labels.

$CIAEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

IATA = Disable

$CIAEN01(CR)

Code IATA

IATA = Enable

IATA Check Character Transmission

Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CIACT01(CR)

IATA Check Character Transmission = Enable

$CIACT00(CR)

IATA Check Character Transmission = Disable

DEFAULT

166 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Codabar

$CCBEN01(CR)

CODABAR

The following options apply to the Codabar symbology.

Codabar Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Codabar bar codes.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CCBEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Codabar = Disable

Codabar = Enable

$CCBCC01(CR)

Codabar Check Character Calculation

Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character

$CCBCC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable AIM standard check char.

$CCBCC02(CR)

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable Modulo

10 check char.

Product Reference Guide 167

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Codabar bar code data.

Codabar

$CCBCT00(CR)

$CCBCT01(CR)

Codabar Check Character Transmission = Send

Codabar Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

DEFAULT

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission

Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.

$CCBSS00(CR)

$CCBSS01(CR)

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t

Transmit

DEFAULT

168 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Codabar Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set

This option specifies the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.

$CCBSC00(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/TN*E

$CCBSC01(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/ABCD

$CCBSC03(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/abcd

$CCBSC02(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/tn*e

DEFAULT

$CCBSM01(CR)

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match

When enabled, this option requires that start and stop characters match.

$CCBSM00(CR)

DEFAULT

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Don’t Require

Match

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Require Match

Product Reference Guide 169

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Codabar

Codabar Quiet Zones

Specifies the number of quiet zones for Codabar labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.

$CCBLO02(CR)

$CCBLO03(CR)

Codabar Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

DEFAULT

$CCBLC01(CR)

Codabar Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Codabar symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CCBLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Codabar Length Control = Variable Length

Codabar Length Control = Fixed Length

170 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Codabar Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Codabar Length ControlCodabar Length

Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in

Variable Length

Mode, or the first fixed length if in

Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s start, stop, check and data

characters. The length must include at least one data character. The length can be set from 3 to

50 characters.

Table 13

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265 for detailed instructions on

setting this feature.

Table 13. Codabar Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting (and pad with leading zeroes)

EXAMPLES

03 Characters 09 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘3’ ‘0’ and ‘9’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CCBL1

Select Codabar Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters

Product Reference Guide 171

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Codabar

Codabar Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Codabar Length ControlCodabar Length

Control

. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed

length if in

Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s start, stop, check and data

characters. The length must include at least one data character.

The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 14 provides examples for setting Length 2. See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 14. Codabar Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting (and pad with leading zeroes)

EXAMPLES

00 Ignore This

Length

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CCBL2

Select Codabar Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

172 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

ABC Codabar Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ABC CODABAR

The following options apply to the ABC Codabar symbology.

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode ABC Codabar labels.

DEFAULT

$CCBAB01(CR)

ABC Codabar = Enable

$CCBAB00(CR)

ABC Codabar = Disable

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode

Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.

DEFAULT

$CCBCM01(CR)

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

$CCBCM00(CR)

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Static

Product Reference Guide 173

Enter/Exit Programming Mode ABC Codabar

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout

Specifies the timeout in 10-millisecond ticks used by the ABC Codabar Dynamic

Concatenation Mode.

$CCBDT05(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec

$CCBDT0A(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec

DEFAULT

$CCBDT14(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec

$CCBDT32(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec

$CCBDT4B(CR)

$CCBDT64(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 Second

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec

174 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

ABC Codabar

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation

Forces labels starting or ending with D to be concatenated.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

DEFAULT

$CCBFC01(CR)

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Enable

$CCBFC00(CR)

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Disable

Product Reference Guide 175

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 11

The following options apply to the Code 11 symbology.

Code 11 Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Code 11 bar codes.

$CC1EN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 11 = Disable

$CC1EN01(CR)

Code 11

Code 11 = Enable

Code 11 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of optional Code 11 check character.

$CC1CC00(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CC1CC01(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C

$CC1CC02(CR)

$CC1CC03(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C and K

176

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check K

DEFAULT

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 11 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11 Check Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 11 check character.

$CC1CT00(CR)

$CC1CT01(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

DEFAULT

$CC1LC01(CR)

Code 11 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 11 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC1LC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 11 Length Control = Variable Length

Code 11 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 177

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Code 11

Code 11 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Code 11 Length Control . Length 1 is the

minimum label length if in Variable Length

Mode, or the first fixed length if in

Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to

50 characters.

Table 15

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265 for detailed instructions on

setting this feature.

Table 15. Code 11 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes)

EXAMPLES

02 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CC1L1

Select Code 11 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

04 = Length 1 is 4 Characters

178 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 11 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Code 11 Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in

Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters.

The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 16 provides examples for setting Length 2. See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 16. Code 11 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes)

00 (Ignore This

Length)

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ and 0’

$CC1.2

Select Code 11 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

~

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 179

Enter/Exit Programming Mode GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL

The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14) symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional bar codes.

$C4BEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Disable

$C4BEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Enable

$C4BU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation

When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.

$C4BU800(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation =

Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation =

Enable

180 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component

This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label for this symbology is decoded.

$C4B2D00(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component =

Disable (2D component not required)

$C4B2D01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component =

2D component must be decoded

GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED

The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded) symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Expanded bar codes.

DEFAULT

$CXBEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Enable

$CXBEN00(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Disable

Product Reference Guide 181

Enter/Exit Programming Mode GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation

When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Expanded bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.

$CXBU800(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Disable

$CXBU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

$CXB2D01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component

This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$CXB2D00(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component = Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component = Enable

182 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the GS1

DataBar™ Expanded symbology.

Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CXBLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Variable

Length

$CXBLC01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 183

Enter/Exit Programming Mode GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length

Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in

Variable Length

Mode, or the first fixed length if in

Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 74 characters.

Table 17

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265 for detailed instructions on

setting this feature.

Table 17. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

01 Character 07 Characters 52 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT GS1 DataBar™ EXPANDED LENGTH 1SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘5’ and ‘2’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

74 Characters

‘7’ AND ‘4’

$CXBL1

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

184 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length

Control

. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed

length if in

Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length

can be set from 1 to 74 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 18 provides examples for setting Length 2. See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 18. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

00 (ignore second length)

07 Characters 52 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT GS1 DataBar™ EXPANDED LENGTH 2 SETTING

74 Characters

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘5’ and ‘2’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

‘7’ and ‘4’

$CXBL2

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

74 = Length 2 is 74 Characters

Product Reference Guide 185

Enter/Exit Programming Mode GS1 DataBar™ Limited

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED

The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Limited (formerly RSS Limited) symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Limited bar codes.

DEFAULT

$CLBEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Enable

$CLBEN00(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Disable

$CLBU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation

When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Limited bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.

$CLBU800(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

186 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 93

$CLB2D01(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component

This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$CLB2D00(CR)

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component =

Disable (2D component not required)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component =

2D component must be decoded

CODE 93

The following options apply to the Code 93 symbology.

Code 93 Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Code 93 labels.

$CC9EN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 93 = Disable

$CC9EN01(CR)

Code 93 = Enable

Product Reference Guide 187

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 93 check character.

Code 93

$CC9CC00(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CC9CC01(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C

$CC9CC02(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check K

$CC9CC03(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C and K

Code 93 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 93 check character.

$CC9CT00(CR)

$CC9CT01(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Disable

DEFAULT

188 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 93

$CC9LC01(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 93 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC9LC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 93 Length Control = Variable Length

Code 93 = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 189

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

Code 93

Code 93 Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Code 93 Length Control . Length 1 is the minimum

label length if in

Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.

Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters.

Table 19

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265 for detailed instructions on

setting this feature.

Table 19. Code 93 Length 1 Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

01 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 1 SETTING

50 Characters

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC9L1

Select Code 93 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

190 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 93

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Code 93 Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in

Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of

0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 20 provides examples for setting Length 2. See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 20. CODE 93 Length 2 Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

00 (Ignore This

Length)

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CC9L2

Select Code 93 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 191

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Quiet Zones

Enables/disables quiet zones for Code 93.

$CC9LO02(CR)

$CC9LO03(CR)

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

DEFAULT

MSI

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

$CMSEN01(CR)

MSI

The following options apply to the MSI symbology.

MSI Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode MSI labels.

$CMSEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

MSI = Disable

MSI = Enable

192 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

MSI

$CMSCC01(CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI Check Character Calculation

Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional MSI check character.

$CMSCC00(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Disable

DEFAULT

MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10

$CMSCC02(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod11/10

$CMSCC03(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10/10

MSI Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.

$CMSCT00(CR)

$CMSCT01(CR)

MSI Check Character Transmission = Enable

MSI Check Character Transmission = Disable

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide 193

Enter/Exit Programming Mode MSI

MSI Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the

MSI symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMSLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

MSI Length Control = Variable Length

$CMSLC01(CR)

MSI = Fixed Length

194 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

MSI

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for MSI Length Control . Length 1 is the

minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set

from 01 to 50 characters.

Table 21

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265 for detailed instructions on

setting this feature.

Table 21. MSI Length 1 Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

01 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CMSL1

Select MSI Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 195

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

MSI

MSI Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for MSI Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters.

The length does not include start/stop characters.

The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length

(only one fixed length).

Table 22 provides examples for setting Length 2. See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 22. MSI Length 2 Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

00 (Ignore This

Length)

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 2 SETTING

50 Characters

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CMSL2

Select MSI Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

196 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Plessey

$CPLEN01CR)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PLESSEY

The following options apply to the Plessey symbology.

Plessey Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.

$CPLEN00CR)

DEFAULT

Plessey = Disable

$CPLCC01(CR)

Plessey = Enable

Plessey Check Character Calculation

Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Plessey check character.

$CPLCC00(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation = Disable

DEFAULT

Plessey Check Character Calculation =

Enable Plessey std. check char. verification

$CPLCC02(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation =

Enable Anker check char. verification

$CPLCC03(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation =

Enable Plessey std. and Anker check char verification

Product Reference Guide 197

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Plessey Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.

$CPLCT00(CR)

$CPLCT01(CR)

Plessey Check Character Transmission = Enable

Plessey

Plessey Check Character Transmission = Disable

DEFAULT

$CPLLC01(CR)

Plessey Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Plessey symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CPLLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Plessey Length Control = Variable Length

Plessey = Fixed Length

198 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

Plessey Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Plessey Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Plessey Length Control . Length 1 is the

minimum label length if in Variable Length

Mode, or the first fixed length if in

Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters.

Table 23

provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 265 for detailed instructions on

setting this feature.

Table 23. Plessey Length 1 Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

01 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT Plessey LENGTH 1 SETTING

50 Characters

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CPLL1

Select Plessey Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 199

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

Plessey

Plessey Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Plessey Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in

Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.

The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Table 24 provides examples for setting Length 2. See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 24. Plessey Length 2 Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

00 (Ignore This

Length)

07 Characters 15 Characters

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT PLESSEY LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

$CPLL2

Select Plessey Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

200 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

2D SYMBOLOGIES

2D Global Features

2D Maximum Decoding Time, page 202

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control, page 203

2D Structured Append, page 203

2D Symbologies

The reader supports the following 2D symbologies (bar code types). Symbology-dependent

options for each symbology are included in this chapter. See

"1D Code Selection" starting on page 109

for configuration of 1D bar codes.

Aztec Code, page 204

China Sensible Code, page 207

Data Matrix, page 210

Maxicode, page 213

PDF417, page 216

Micro PDF417, page 219

QR Code, page 222

Micro QR Code, page 225

UCC Composite, page 228

Postal Code Selection, page 230

2D Global Features

The following features are common to all, or in some cases, most of the available 2D symbologies. Default settings are indicated at each feature/option with a green arrow. Also reference

Appendix B, Standard Defaults

for a listing of the most widely used set of standard factory settings. That section also provides space to record any custom settings needed or implemented for your system.

To set most features:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code at the top of applicable programming pages.

2. Scan the correct bar code to set the desired programming feature or parameter. You may need to cover unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to

Appendix D, Keypad , and scan the

appropriate characters from the keypad.

Additional information about many features can be found in the “References” chapter.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code to exit Programming Mode.

Product Reference Guide 201

Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

2D Maximum Decoding Time

This feature specifies the maximum amount of time the software will spend attempting to decode a 2D label. The selectable range is 10 milliseconds to 2.55 milliseconds.

$CDETM0A(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 100 msec

$CDETM23(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 350 msec

$CDETM32(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 200 msec

DEFAULT

$CDETM80(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 500 msec

$CDETM16(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 1 Second

$CDETMC8(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 2 Seconds

$CDETMFF(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 2.55 Seconds

202 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

2D Structured Append

Enables/disables ability of reader to append multiple 2D Codes labels in a structured format.

The structured append property is globally applied to the following symbologies, if these are enabled:

• Data Matrix

• QR Code

• Aztec

• PDF 417

$CDESA00(CR)

DEFAULT

Structured Append = Disable

$CDESA01(CR)

Structured Append = Enable

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control

Specifies the options available for decoding normal/negative printed 2D symbols. This configuration item applies globally to all the 2D symbologies that support that feature according to Standard AIM Specification: Data Matrix, QR, MicroQR, Aztec and Chinese

Sensible Code.

To decode all symbologies, including linear symbologies, refer to " Decode Negative Image" on page 106

D Symbology Selection

$CIPNR00(CR)

DEFAULT

Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Normal

$CIPNR01(CR)

Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Inverse

Product Reference Guide

$CIPNR02(CR)

Normal/Inverse Symbol Control =

Both Normal and Inverse

203

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Aztec Code

Aztec Code Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Aztec Code labels.

$CAZEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Aztec Code = Disable

Aztec Code

$CAZEN01(CR)

Aztec Code = Enable

Aztec Code Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CAZLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Aztec Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CAZLC01(CR)

Aztec Code Length Control = Fixed Length

204 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Aztec Code Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Aztec Code Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Aztec Code Length Control . Length 1 is the minimum

label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.

Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,832 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CAZL1

Select Aztec Code Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 205

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Aztec Code

Aztec Code Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Aztec Code Length Control . Length 2 is

the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,832 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CAZL2

Select Aztec Code Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 3,832 Characters

206 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

China Sensible Code

China Sensible Code

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

China Sensible Code Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode China Sensible Code labels.

$CCSEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

China Sensible Code = Disable

$CCSEN01(CR)

China Sensible Code = Enable

China Sensible Code Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CCSLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

China Sensible Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CCSLC01(CR)

China Sensible Code Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 207

Enter/Exit Programming Mode China Sensible Code

China Sensible Code

Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for

China Sensible Code Length Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,827 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CCSL1

Select China Sensible Code Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

208 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

China Sensible Code Enter/Exit Programming Mode

China Sensible Code Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

China Sensible Code Length Control

.

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,827 characters in increments of

0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CCSL2

Select China Sensible Code Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 7,827 Characters

Product Reference Guide 209

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Matrix

Data Matrix Enable / Disable

Enables/disables ability of reader to decode Data Matrix labels.

$CDMEN00(CR)

Data Matrix

Data Matrix = Disable

$CDMEN01(CR)

DEFAULT

Data Matrix = Enable

Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style

Specifies the options available when reading Data Matrix with different form factors. Choices are:

• Square Style

• Rectangular Style

• Both Square and Rectangular Style

The configuration item can also be configured as a bit mask to filter one or more Data Matrix labels with different symbol size AND shape styles.

$CDMDM3FFF0BDF)

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Square Style

$CDMDM0000420

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Rectangular Style

DEFAULT

$CDMD03FFFFFF

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask =

Both Square and Rectangular Style

210 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Matrix Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Matrix Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CDMLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Data Matrix Length Control = Variable Length

$CDMLC01(CR)

Data Matrix Length Control = Fixed Length

Data Matrix

Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Data Matrix Length Control . Length 1 is the minimum

label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.

Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,116 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CDML1

Select Data Matrix Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 211

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Data Matrix

Data Matrix Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Data Matrix Length Control

. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,116 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CDML2

Select Data Matrix Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 3,116 Characters

212 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Maxicode

Maxicode

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Maxicode Enable / Disable

Enables/disables ability of reader to decode Maxicode labels.

$CMXEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Maxicode = Disable

$CMXEN01(CR)

Maxicode = Enable

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission

Enables/disables the transmission of only the Primary Message when the Secondary

Message is not readable.

$CMXPT00(CR)

DEFAULT

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission = Disable

$CMXPT01(CR)

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission = Enable

Product Reference Guide 213

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Maxicode

Maxicode Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMXLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Maxicode Length Control = Variable Length

$CMXLC01(CR)

Maxicode Length Control = Fixed Length

Maxicode

Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Maxicode Length Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.

Characters can be set from 0001 to 0145 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMXL1

Select Maxicode Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

214 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Maxicode Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Maxicode Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Maxicode Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0145 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMXL2

Select Maxicode Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 0145 Characters

Product Reference Guide 215

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PDF417

PDF417 Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode PDF417 labels.

$CP4EN00(CR)

$CP4EN01(CR)

PDF417 = Disable

DEFAULT

PDF417 = Enable

PDF417

PDF417 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CP4LC00(CR)

DEFAULT

PDF417 Length Control = Variable Length

$CP4LC01(CR)

PDF417 Length Control = Fixed Length

216 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

PDF417 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PDF417 Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for

PDF417 Length Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.

Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to 2,710 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 2,710 will be considered to be 2,710.

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CP4L1

Select PDF417 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 217

Enter/Exit Programming Mode PDF417

PDF417 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

PDF417 Length Control

. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. Characters can be set from 01 to 2,710 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 2,710 will be considered to be 2,710.

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CP4L2

Select PDF417 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 2,710 Characters

218 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Micro PDF417

Micro PDF417

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Micro PDF417 labels.

$CMIEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Micro PDF417 = Disable

$CMIEN01(CR)

Micro PDF417 = Enable

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation

Specifies which AIM ID to use for MicroPDF labels when doing Code 128 or GS1-128 emulation.

Emulation choices are:

• Micro PDF AIM ID and label type

• Code 128 / EAN128 AIM Id and label type

$CMIU800(CR)

DEFAULT

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation =

Micro PDF AIM ID and label type

$CMIU801(CR)

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation =

Code 128 / EAN128 AIM ID and label type

Product Reference Guide 219

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Micro PDF417

Micro PDF417 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMILC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Micro PDF417 Length Control = Variable Length

$CMILC01(CR)

Micro PDF417 Length Control = Fixed Length

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for

Micro PDF417 Length Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to

0366 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 0366 will be considered to be 0366.

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMIL1

Select Micro PDF417 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

220 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Micro PDF417 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro PDF417 Length Control

. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed

Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0366 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 0366 will be considered to be 0366.

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMIL2

Select Micro PDF417 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 0366 Characters

Product Reference Guide 221

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

QR Code

QR Code Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode QR Code labels.

$CQREN00(CR)

$CQREN01(CR)

QR Code = Disable

DEFAULT

QR Code = Enable

QR Code

QR Code Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CQRLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

QR Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CQRLC01(CR)

QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

222 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

QR Code Enter/Exit Programming Mode

QR Code

Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for

QR Code Length Control

. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.

Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,089 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CQRL1

Select QR Code Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 223

Enter/Exit Programming Mode QR Code

QR Code

Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for

QR Code Length Control . Length 2 is the

maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,089 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CQRL2

Select QR Code Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 7,089 Characters

224 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Micro QR Code

Micro QR Code

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro QR Code Enable/Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Micro QR Code labels.

MQEN00

DEFAULT

Micro QR Code = Disable

MQEN01

Micro QR Code = Enable

Micro QR Code Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMQLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Micro QR Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CMQLC01(CR)

Micro QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 225

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Micro QR Code

Micro QR Code

Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro QR Code Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length

Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0035 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMQL1

Select Micro QR Code Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

226 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Micro QR Code Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro QR Code

Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro QR Code Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0035 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).

See

page 265

for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMQL2

Select QR Code Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D, Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 0035 Characters

Product Reference Guide 227

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UCC Composite

UCC Composite

UCC Composite Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode the stacked part of a UCC Composite label.

This feature is not effective when Global AIM IDs are enabled (see " Global

AIM ID" on page 77 ).

DEFAULT

$CCMEN01(CR)

UCC Composite = Enable

$CCMEN00(CR)

UCC Composite = Disable

228 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

UCC Composite

UCC Optional Composite Timer

Specifies the amount of time the system will wait for the stacked part of a UCC Composite label before transmitting the linear label without an add-on.

$CCMOT00(CR)

DEFAULT

UCC Optional Composite Timer = Timer Disabled

$CCMOT01(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 100msec

$CCMOT02(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 200msec

$CCMOT03(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 300msec

$CCMOT04(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 400msec

$CCMOT05(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 500msec

Product Reference Guide 229

Postal Code Selection

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode labels of a specific postal symbology.

• Disable All Postal Codes

• Postnet

• Planet

• Royal Mail

• Kix

Australia Post

• Japan Post

• IMB

• Sweden Post

Portugal Post

$CPOEN00(CR)

DEFAULT

Postal Code Selection = Disable All Postal Codes

$CPOEN01(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Postnet

$CPOEN02(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Planet

$CPOEN03(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Royal Mail

$CPOEN04(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Kix

$CPOEN05(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Australia Post

230 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Postal Code Selection

Postal Code Selection — cont.

$CPOEN06(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Japan Post

$CPOEN07(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable IMB

$CPOEN08(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Sweden Post

$CPOEN09(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Portugal Post

Postnet BB Control

Controls the ability of the scanner to decode B and B' fields of Postnet labels.

$CPOBB00(CR)

DEFAULT

Postnet BB Control = Disable

$CPOBB01(CR)

Postnet BB Control = Enable

Product Reference Guide 231

NOTES

232 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

WIRELESS FEATURES

This section provides options and programming related to the reader’s wireless communication features. Reference

Appendix B. for a listing of standard factory settings.

W IRELESS B EEPER F EATURES starting on page

234

Good Transmission Beep

Beep Frequency

Beep Duration

Beep Volume

Disconnect Beep

Docking Beep

Leash Alarm

C ONFIGURATION U PDATES starting on page 239

Automatic Configuration Update

Copy Configuration to Scanner

Copy Configuration to Base Station

B ATCH F EATURES starting on page 240

Batch Mode

Send Batch

Erase Batch Memory

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay

D IRECT R ADIO A UTOLINK starting on page 242

B LUETOOTH -O NLY F EATURES starting on page 243

Source Radio Address Transmission

Select PIN Code Length

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

Link Timeout

BT Security Mode

BT PIN Code

Set PIN Code

BT Poll Rate

Power Off

Powerdown Timeout

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY starting on page 249

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

STAR Radio Transmit Mode

Product Reference Guide 233

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Wireless Beeper Features

Wireless Beeper Features

Several options are available to configure beeper behavior for RF operation.

Good Transmission Beep

Enables/disables the Good Transmission Beep indication. When enabled, a beep occurs when a

Label is correctly transmitted to the base.

$CBTAB00(CR)

Good Transmission Beep = Disable

$CBTAB01(CR)

Good Transmission Beep = Enable

DEFAULT

234

Beep Frequency

Adjusts radio-specific beep indications to sound at a low, medium or high frequency, selectable from the list below (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).

$CBTBF00(CR)

DEFAULT

Beep Frequency = Low

$CBTBF01(CR)

Beep Frequency = Medium

$CBTBF02(CR)

Beep Frequency = High

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Wireless Beeper Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Beep Duration

This feature controls the duration of radio-specific beep indications .

$CBTBD06(CR)

Beep Duration = 60 msec

$CBTBD08(CR)

Beep Duration = 80 msec

DEFAULT

$CBTBD0A(CR)

Beep Duration = 100 msec

$CBTBD0C(CR)

Beep Duration = 120 msec

$CBTBD0E(CR)

Beep Duration = 140 msec

$CBTBD10(CR)

Beep Duration = 160 msec

$CBTBD12(CR)

Beep Duration = 180 msec

$CBTBD14(CR)

Beep Duration = 200 msec

Product Reference Guide 235

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Wireless Beeper Features

Beep Volume

Selects the beeper volume (loudness) of radio-specific beep indications. There are three selectable volume levels.

$CBTBV00(CR)

Beep Volume = Low

$CBTBV01(CR)

Beep Volume = Medium

$CBTBV02(CR)

DEFAULT

Beep Volume = High

Disconnect Beep

Enables/disables the beep indication that a handheld has become connected or disconnected from a Base Station.

The defaults are different for the STAR and BT models.

$CBTDB01(CR)

Disconnect Beep = Enable

$CBTDB00(CR)

Disconnect Beep = Disable

DEFAULT

236 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Wireless Beeper Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Docking Beep

Enables/disables a beep indication when the handheld is placed in the Base Station.

$CBTCB00(CR)

Docking Beep = Disable

$CBTCB01(CR)

DEFAULT

Docking Beep = Enable

Leash Alarm

This setting specifies the number of seconds to sound the Leash Mode beeps (three per second) when the handheld goes out of range. This is especially useful in instances where the reader might inadvertently have been placed in a bag or cart.

For this mode to be effective, the reader must be linked to the Base Station. If the reader is asleep or disconnected from the Base Station, there is no way for it to know where it is relative to the Base Station because communication is not active between the devices.

$CBTLB00(CR)

DEFAULT

Leash Alarm = Disabled

$CBTLB01(CR)

Leash Alarm = 1 Second

$CBTLB02(CR)

Leash Alarm = 2 Seconds

Product Reference Guide 237

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Leash Alarm — cont.

$CBTLB03(CR)

Leash Alarm = 3 Seconds

Wireless Beeper Features

$CBTLB04(CR)

Leash Alarm = 4 Seconds

$CBTLB05(CR)

Leash Alarm = 5 Seconds

$CBTLB19(CR)

Leash Alarm = 25 Seconds

$CBTLB0A(CR)

Leash Alarm = 10 Seconds

$CBTLB1E(CR)

Leash Alarm = 30 Seconds

238 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Configuration Updates Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Configuration Updates

See

page 285

in “References” for detailed information and examples of these features.

Automatic Configuration Update

When this feature is enabled, a reader and its linked Base Station can automatically ensure they stay in sync with regard to application hardware and/or configuration. See

page 285 for more in-

formation on this feature.

$CBTCU00(CR)

Automatic Configuration Update = Disable

$CBTCU01(CR)

DEFAULT

Automatic Configuration Update = Enable

Copy Configuration to Scanner

Scan the following label to copy the current Base Station configuration to the scanner. Use this method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time configuration update to be performed on the scanner.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this bar code.

py g

Copy Configuration to Scanner

Copy Configuration to Base Station

Scan the following label to copy the current scanner configuration to the Base Station. Use this method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time

Product Reference Guide

Copy Configuration to Base Station

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label with this bar code.

239

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Batch Features

Batch Features

Batch Mode

This option specifies whether to store labels in the handheld while disconnected from the base.

Options are as follows:

• Disabled — The handheld will not store/batch labels.

• Automatic — The handheld will store labels to RAM when the handheld goes out of range and is disconnected from the remote device.

• Manual — The handheld will always store labels to Flash memory. The user must manually send the stored labels to the remote device using a special "batch send" label.

$CBTBM00(CR)

DEFAULT

Batch Mode = Disabled

$CBTBM01(CR)

Batch Mode = Automatic

$CBTBM02(CR)

Batch Mode = Manual

Send Batch

Use this bar code to initiate sending of labels stored in batch memory.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this bar code.

BatchSend

Send Batch

240 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Batch Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Erase Batch Memory

Use this bar code to erase any labels stored in batch memory.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this bar code.

Erase Batch Memory

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay

Specifies the delay in 10 msec increments between transmitting labels stored in batch memory.

$CBTTD00(CR)

DEFAULT

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = No Delay

$CBTTD05(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 50 mS

$CBTTD0A(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 100 mS

$CBTTD32(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 0.5 seconds

$CBTTD64(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 1 second

$CBTTDFA(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 2.5 seconds

Product Reference Guide 241

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Direct Radio Autolink

Direct Radio Autolink

This feature enables/disables the ability to link a wireless handheld to a base station without scanning the Unlink label first.

$CBTDL00(CR)

DEFAULT

Direct Radio Link = Unlink Label Required

$CBTDL01(CR)

Direct Radio Link = Automatic Unlinking

242 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RF Address Stamping Enter/Exit Programming Mode

BLUETOOTH-ONLY FEATURES

The features in this section are valid only for Gryphon Bluetooth models. Also reference the

Setup section for instructions on

Linking a BT Reader to a PC, starting on page 26 .

RF Address Stamping

These features allow configuration of source radio data inclusion.

Source Radio Address Transmission

Enables/disables the ability of source radio address information to be transmitted to the host

and, if so, at what position with respect to the label data. See page 285 in “References” for

detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

When included as a prefix, the source-radio ID is displayed after all label formatting has been applied. The 6 byte hex address is sent as 12 ascii characters, i.e., an address of 00 06 66 00 1A ED will be sent as (shown in hex):

30 30 30 36 36 36 30 30 31 41 45 44

$CBTAS00(CR)

DEFAULT

Source Radio Address Transmission = Do Not Include

$CBTAS01(CR)

Source Radio Address Transmission = Prefix

Product Reference Guide 243

Enter/Exit Programming Mode RF Address Stamping

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio address when address stamping is enabled.

This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on page 243 is enabled.

$CBTAD

Set Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D. Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 00 = No Delimiter Character

$CBTLT

Link Timeout

This feature specifies the wait time in one-second ticks for response from the remote. The selectable timeout range is 01 to 40 (01-0x28) seconds in one second increments.

See

page 258

for more information on setting this feature.

Set Link Timeout

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the

Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D. Keypad

representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT 02 Link Timeout value is 2 seconds

244 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

BT Security Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

BT Security Features

The BT system can be set up to require a configurable PIN code to authenticate/connect BT devices, and encrypt the data. This can be done in one of two ways:

• The scanner can be programmed with a PIN code using the bar codes in this section.

• The Host can be set up to specify a custom security PIN code when a scanner attempts to connect. For more information about this feature, contact Datalogic Technical Support.

The Gryphon GBT4400 can be set up to require a PIN code when connecting to the host. If you are adding new equipment to a system that uses a custom security

PIN, please read this section for information before proceeding.

Follow these steps to set the PIN code for a scanner:

1. Enable BT Security Mode by scanning the “Enable” bar code below.

2. Select a PIN code length of either 4 or 16 characters by scanning the appropriate bar code

in "Select PIN Code Length" on page 246.

3. Scan the relevant bar code from "Set PIN Code" on page 246, then scan the desired alpha-

numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D. Keypad

to set the PIN code.

See

page 287

in “References” for more detailed information and examples for this feature.

BT Security Mode

This feature enables/disables authentication and encryption of the BT link. Use the feature "BT

PIN Code" on page 246 to specify the length and digits in the PIN code used to authenticate

the BT Link.

Changing the security mode setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default “Enabled” setting, the devices must only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to “Disabled,” the Security

Mode setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin. After the Base

Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.

$CBTSE00(CR)

DEFAULT

BT Security Mode = Disable

$CBTSE01(CR)

BT Security Mode = Enable

Product Reference Guide 245

Enter/Exit Programming Mode BT Security Features

BT PIN Code

After enabling Security Mode (see "BT Security Mode" on page 245), specify whether you want

to set a 4-digit or a 16-digit PIN Code.

See page 287 for detailed information and examples for

setting this feature.

Select PIN Code Length

$CBTPC\r

DEFAULT

Select 4-character BT PIN Code

$CBTP6\r

$CBTPS00\r

Select 16-character BT PIN Code

Set PIN Code

Determine the desired characters for the PIN code, then convert to hexadecimal using the

ASCII Chart

on the inside back cover of this manual.

See

page 287 for detailed information and

examples for setting this feature.

Set 4-character BT PIN Code

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D. Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~$CBTPS01\r

~

Set 16-character BT PIN Code

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT 31323334 = Default PIN Code is 1234

246 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Other BT Features

Other BT Features

BT Poll Rate

This feature specifies the time between BT polls.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CBTST00(CR)

BT Poll Rate = Maximum BT Poll Rate

$CBTST01(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 10 ms

$CBTST02(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 20 ms

DEFAULT

$CBTST05(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 50 ms

$CBTST0A(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 100 ms

$CBTST14(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 200 ms

Product Reference Guide 247

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Power Off

See “Power Off” on page 27 for information about this BT feature.

Other BT Features

Powerdown Timeout

The Powerdown Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the unit off when the imager has been idle.

$CSLPS00(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = Disable

$CSLPS01(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 10 minutes

$CSLPS02(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 20 minutes

R)$CSLPS03(CR

)

Powerdown Timeout = 30 minutes

$CSLPS06(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 60 Minutes (1 Hour)

$CSLPS0C(CR)

248

Powerdown Timeout = 120 Minutes (2 Hours)

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Other BT Features

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY

The features in this section are valid only for the Gryphon I GM440X Star model:

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

STAR Radio Transmit Mode

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and

Base Station is considered failed.

When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the

same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds. See page 286

in

“References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

Set Radio Protocol Timeout

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

DEFAULT

CANCEL

02 = 2 Seconds Radio Protocol Timeout

Product Reference Guide 249

250

STAR Radio Transmit Mode

Specifies the transmission protocol for Star communications.

Options are:

• ACK from cradle to scanner — signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station receives a label

• ACK when sent to host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent the label to the host

• ACK from host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent the label to the host and host has replied with an acknowledge message.

DEFAULT

ACK from cradle

ACK when sent to host

ACK from host

ACK from host works only for RS-232 or USB-COM interfaces with ACK/

NACK disabled. If ACK from host is configured with any other interface conditions, it works like ACK when sent to host.

See "Message Formatting" on page 289 for details.

The Base Station can receive a host message only if Host Commands

Obey/Ignore (page 39) is set to Ignore.

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

MOTION FEATURES

M OTION A IMING C ONTROL on page 251

M OTION S ENSITIVITY on page 252

M OTIONLESS T IMEOUT on page 252

Use this chapter to configure motion settings for the handheld.

Reference

Appendix B for a listing of standard factory settings.

Motion Aiming Control

Configures the ability of the scanner to Enable/Disable the Aiming system when motion is detected.

$CMOMD00(CR)

$CMOMD01(CR)

Motion Aiming Control = Enable

Motion Aiming Control = Disable

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide 251

Enter/Exit Programming Mode Motion Features

Motion Sensitivity

Defines discrete set of levels for scanner motion sensitivity when in handheld use.

$CMOSY00(CR)

$CMOSY01(CR)

Motion Sensitivity = Medium

Motion Sensitivity = Low

DEFAULT

$CMOSY02(CR)

Motion Sensitivity = High

Motionless Timeout

Specifies the waiting time in 100 millisecond ticks to assume that the reader is in a motionless condition. The selectable range is 500 msec to 25.5 Seconds. When no motion event is detected for a period of time longer than this timeout, the software assumes the reader is in a motionless condition. This normally results in returning the scanner to Stand Mode. This option relates to such features as Aimer On and Stand Mode Object Sense scanning with respect to motion. See

" Motionless Timeout" on page 288 in References.

$CMOTO

Select Motionless Timeout Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by three digits from the Alphanumeric characters in

Appendix D Keypad representing your

desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT 020 = Motionless Timeout = 2 seconds

252 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 4

References

This section contains explanations and examples of selected bar code features. See

"Configuration Using Bar Codes" starting on page 37 for the actual bar code labels used to

configure the reader.

RS-232 Parameters............................................................................................. 254

RS-232 Only......................................................................................... 254

RS-232/USB COM Parameters....................................................... 255

Keyboard Interface ............................................................................................ 262

Wedge Quiet Interval....................................................................... 262

Intercharacter Delay......................................................................... 263

Intercode Delay.................................................................................. 264

Symbologies......................................................................................................... 265

Set Length............................................................................................ 265

Data Editing.......................................................................................................... 266

Global Prefix/Suffix........................................................................... 267

Global AIM ID...................................................................................... 268

Label ID................................................................................................. 269

Character Conversion...................................................................... 274

Reading Parameters .......................................................................................... 275

Label Gone Timeout......................................................................... 275

Good Read LED Duration ............................................................... 276

Scanning Features.............................................................................................. 277

Scan Mode ........................................................................................... 277

Stand Mode Off Time....................................................................... 278

Scanning Active Time...................................................................... 279

Aiming Duration Time..................................................................... 280

Flash On Time..................................................................................... 281

Flash Off Time..................................................................................... 282

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology ...................... 283

RF Features ........................................................................................................... 285

Automatic Configuration Update ............................................... 285

RF Address Stamping....................................................................... 285

BT-Only Features ............................................................................... 287

Motion Features.................................................................................................. 288

Motionless Timeout........................................................................................... 288

Product Reference Guide 253

References

RS-232 Parameters

RS-232 Only

Baud Rate

Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the reader's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. With an improper baud rate setting, data may not reach the host correctly.

Stop Bits

The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements.

Parity

This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host device requirements.

• Select None when no parity bit is required.

• Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.

• Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.

Handshaking Control

The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). Handshaking

Control includes the following options:

• RTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored.

• RTS/CTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions.

• RTS/XON/XOFF — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. XON and

XOFF gate transmissions.

• RTS On/CTS — RTS is always asserted. CTS gates transmissions.

RTS/CTS Scan Control — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions and controls enable and disable state of scanner.

254 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Parameters

RS-232/USB COM Parameters

Intercharacter Delay

This parameter specifies the intercharacter de lay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in

10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.

To set the delay:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Go to

page 47

and scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SET-

TING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 25 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 25. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

ACTION

Desired Setting

Divide by 10 (pad with leading zeroes to yield two-digits)

3

4

5

6

50ms

05

150ms

15

EXAMPLES

600ms

60

Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ and ‘0’ ‘6’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

850ms

85

‘8’ and ‘5’

Product Reference Guide 255

References

ACK NAK Options

This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol.

When configured, the reader and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is in error.

Options are:

• Disable

• Enable for label transmission — The reader expects an ACK/NAK response from the host when a label is sent.

• Enable for host-command acknowledge — The reader will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command.

• Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

ACK Character

This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not

recognized when the option Data Bits

has been set as 7 Data Bits.

1. Determine the desired character or value.

2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent

for the desired character/value.

3. Go to

page 50

and scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad , that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will

cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

See

Table 26 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 26. ACK Character Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Character/Value

Hex equivalent from

ASCII

Chart

ACK

0x06

$

0x24

EXAMPLES

@

0x40

>

0x3E

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING

Scan Two Characters from

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘6’ ‘2’ and ‘4’ ‘4’ and ‘0’ ‘3’ AND ‘E’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

256 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

RS-232 Parameters

NAK Character

This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-

bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set

as 7 Data Bits.

To set this feature:

1. Determine the desired character or value.

2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent

for the desired character/value.

3. Go to

page 50

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad , that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will

cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 27 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 27. NAK Character Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Character/Value

Hex equivalent from

ASCII

Chart

NAK

0x15

$

0x24

EXAMPLES

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING

@

0x40

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘2’ and ‘4’ ‘4’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

>

0x3E

‘3’ AND ‘E’

Product Reference Guide 257

References

ACK NAK Timeout Value

This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout.

To set this value:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 200 (setting is in 200ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to

page 51

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 28 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 28. ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Divide by 200

200ms

EXAMPLES

1,000ms (1 sec.) 5200ms (5.2 sec.) 15,000ms (15 sec.)

01 05

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

26

Scan SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘2’ and ‘6’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

75

‘7’ and ‘5’

258 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Parameters

ACK NAK Retry Count

This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries.

To set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005,

20 = 020, etc.

3. Go to

page 51

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad , that represent

the number which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 29 for some examples of how to set this feature.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table 29. ACK NAK Retry Count Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Pad with leading zero(es)

Disable Retry

Count

000

3 Retries

003

EXAMPLES

54 Retries

054

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING

Scan Three Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’ ‘0’, ‘5’ and ‘4’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Unlimited Retries

255

‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

Product Reference Guide 259

References

Disable Character

Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.

ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-

bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set

as 7 Data Bits.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

To set the value:

1. Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Disable Character is not used (not available).

2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent

for the desired character/value.

3. Go to

page 53

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad , that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will

cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 30 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 30. Disable Character Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired character/value ‘d’ ‘}’

EXAMPLES

‘D’

Disable Command

Not Used

Hex equivalent from

ASCII

Chart

0x64 0x7D 0x44

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘6’ and ‘4’ ‘7’ and ‘D’ ‘4’ and ‘4’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

0xFF

‘F’ AND ‘F’

260 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

RS-232 Parameters

Enable Character

Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.

ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-

bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set

as 7 Data Bits.

To set this feature:

Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Enable Character is not used (not available).

1. Determine the desired character or value.

2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent

for the desired character/value.

3. Go to

page 53

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad , that represent the desired character/value in step 2 above. The second character will

cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 31 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 31. Enable Character Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired character/value ‘e’ ‘}’

EXAMPLES

‘E’

Enable Command

Not Used

Hex equivalent from

ASCII

Chart

0x65 0x7D 0x45

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘6’ and ‘5’ ‘7’ and ‘D’ ‘4’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

0xFF

‘F’ AND ‘F’

Product Reference Guide 261

References

Keyboard Interface

Wedge Quiet Interval

Specifies the amount of time the reader looks for keyboard activity before it breaks the keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The range is from 0 to 990ms in 10ms increments.

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to

page 61

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Prog. Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

This completes the procedure to set the Wedge Quiet Interval. See

Table 32

for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 32. Wedge Quiet Interval Setting Examples

ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting

Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes)

10ms

01

150ms

15

600ms

60

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

850ms

85

‘8’ and ‘5’

262 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Interface

Intercharacter Delay

This parameter specifies the intercharacter de lay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in

10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

To set the delay:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to

page 47

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 33 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 33. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield twodigits)

50ms

05

150ms

15

EXAMPLES

600ms

60

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

850ms

85

‘8’ and ‘5’

Product Reference Guide 263

References

Intercode Delay

Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds.

Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 =

20, etc

3. Go to

page 61

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 34 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 34. Wedge Intercode Delay Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Pad with leading zero(es)

5 Seconds

EXAMPLES

60 Seconds No Delay

00 05

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING

60

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

99 Seconds

99

‘9’ AND ‘9’

264 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Symbologies

Symbologies

Set Length

Length Control allows you to select either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the specified symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.

Length includes the bar code’s data characters only.

The number of characters that can be set varies, depending on the symbology. Reference the page for your selected symbology to see specific variables.

1. Determine the desired character length (varies depending on symbology). Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

2. Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

3. Scan the bar code to SELECT LENGTH 1 SETTING for your selected symbology.

4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Prog Mode.

Set Length 2

This feature allows you to set one of the bar code lengths for the specified symbology. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed

Length Mode. See the page for the specific symbology for parameters.

The length that can be set varies depending on the symbology. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).

Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired character length (from 1 to 50 — or 0 to ignore this length). Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

2. Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

3. Scan the bar code to SELECT LENGTH 2 SETTING for your selected symbology.

Product Reference Guide 265

References

4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

that represent the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake, before the last character scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure.

Data Editing

It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.

CAUTION

When a bar code is scanned, additional information can be sent to the host computer along with the bar code data. This combination of bar code data and supplementary user-defined data is called a “message string.” The Data Editing features can be used to build specific user-defined data into a message string.

There are several types of selectable data characters that can be sent before and after scanned data. You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or only with specific symbologies. Figure 15 shows the available elements you can add to a message string:

Figure 15. Breakdown of a Message String

Label ID Transmission:

Enable this option to transmit the Label ID you configure for the scanned symbology.

OR...

Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

AIM ID: This function is used to identify and display the common label identifier for its symbology. When enabled, this ID code will be transmitted before the scanned bar code data.

00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)

Additional advanced editing is available. See the Advanced formatting features in the Datalogic Aladdin configuration software, or contact Technical

Support (as described on page 10 ) for more information.

266 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Editing

Please Keep In Mind...

• Modifying a message string is not a mandatory requirement. Data editing is a sophisticated feature allowing highly customizable output for advanced users. Factory default settings for data editing is typically set to NONE.

• A prefix or suffix may be applied only to a specified symbology (reference

"1D Code

Selection" starting on page 109

) or across all symbologies (set via the Global features in this chapter).

• You can add any character from the

ASCII Chart (from 00-FF) on the inside back cover of

this manual as a prefix, suffix or Label ID.

• Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the output.

Global Prefix/Suffix

Up to 20 ASCII characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code data) and/ or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data) as indicated in Figure 16.

Figure 16. Prefix and Suffix Positions

OR...

Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data

00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)

AND

OR

Label ID Suffix

Example: Setting a Prefix

In this example, we’ll set a prefix for all symbologies.

1. Determine which ASCII character(s) are to be added to scanned bar code data. In this example, we’ll add a dollar sign (‘$’) as a prefix.

2. Go to

page 76

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code, then scan the SET GLOBAL PREFIX bar code.

3. Reference the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex value

assigned to the desired character. The corresponding hex number for the ‘$’ character is

24. To enter this selection code, scan the ‘2’ and ‘4’ bar codes from

Appendix D, Keypad .

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

4. If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again to exit Programming Mode.

6. The resulting message string would appear as follows:

Scanned bar code data: 12345

Resulting message string output: $12345

Product Reference Guide 267

References

Global AIM ID

This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology types.

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows:

• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...

• A code character (see the table below), followed by...

• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).

SYMBOLOGY

UPC/EAN

Code 39 and

Code 32

Codabar

Interleaved 2 of 5

Code 93

CHAR

E a

A

F

I

G

SYMBOLOGY

Code 128/GS1-128

DataBar Omnidirectional,

DataBar Expanded

Standard 2 of 5

ISBN

Code 11

CHAR

C e

S

X b

H a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs.

b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)

Figure 17. AIM ID

Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

268 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Editing

Label ID

A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex 0x01-

0xFF), used to identify a bar code (symbology) type. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted bar code data depending upon how this option is enabled. This

feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded set (see "Label ID:

Pre-loaded Sets" below) or individually per symbology (see "Label ID: Set Individually Per

Symbology" on page 272). If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry

standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see "Global AIM ID" on page 77.

Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets

The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. Table 35 shows the USA and the EU sets.

When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults will be lost.

CAUTION

ABC CODABAR

ANKER PLESSEY

AZTEC

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE

CODABAR

CODE11

CODE128

CODE32

CODE39

CODE39 CIP

CODE39 DANISH PPT

CODE39 LAPOSTE

CODE39 PZN

CODE93

DATABAR 14

Table 35

.

Label ID Pre-loaded Sets

Symbology

USA Label ID set

Default

Character

$a

$Z

&

R4

Y

$Y

A

*

$S

%

CE

#

S o

Az

Default

ASCII

410000

2A0000

590000

245900

246100

245A00

260000

523400

530000

6F0000

417A00

245300

250000

434500

230000

EU Label ID set

Default

Character

$a

$Z

U u

Y

$Y

X

V b

T

$S

R

S o

!

Default

ASCII

580000

560000

590000

245900

246100

245A00

550000

750000

530000

6F0000

210000

245300

520000

620000

540000

Product Reference Guide 269

References

Symbology

DATABAR 14 COMPOSITE

DATABAR EXPANDED

DATABAR EXPANDED COMPOSITE

DATABAR LIMITED

DATABAR LIMITED COMPOSITE

DATA MATRIX

EAN128

EAN128 COMPOSITE

EAN13

EAN13 P2

EAN13 P5

EAN13 COMPOSITE

EAN8

EAN8 P2

EAN8 P5

EAN8 COMPOSITE

FOLLET 2OF5

GTIN

GTIN2

GTIN5

I2OF5

IATA INDUSTRIAL 2OF5

INDUSTRIAL 2OF5

ISBN

ISBT128 CONCAT

ISSN

MAXICODE

MICRO QR

MICRO PDF

270

USA Label ID set

Default

Character

R4

RX

RX

RL

RL

Dm

Default

ASCII

4F0000

470000

473200

473500

690000

494100

570000

490000

660000

6E0000

4D4300

245100

6D5000

460000

460000

460000

460000

464600

464600

464600

464600

523400

525800

525800

524C00

524C00

446D00

000000

000000

W

I i

IA

O

G

G2

G5 f n

MC

$Q mP

FF

FF

FF

FF

F

F

F

F

EU Label ID set

Default

Character

W

@

N

&

O

$A

$B

$C x

$Q f n

8

K

$G

A

J

M

$F

B

L k

$E i w d v c t

Default

ASCII

4F0000

244100

244200

244300

4E0000

260000

570000

400000

660000

6E0000

780000

245100

380000

420000

4C0000

4D0000

244600

410000

4A0000

4B0000

244700

523400

740000

525800

760000

524C00

770000

6B0000

244500

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Symbology

MSI

PDF417

PLESSEY

POSTAL AUSTRALIAN

POSTAL IMB

POSTAL JAPANESE

POSTAL KIX

POSTAL PLANET

POSTAL PORTUGAL

POSTAL POSTNET BB

POSTAL ROYAL MAIL

POSTAL SWEDISH

POSTNET

QR CODE

S25

TRIOPTIC

UPCA

UPCA P2

UPCA P5

UPCA COMPOSITE

UPCE

UPCE P2

UPCE P5

UPCE COMPOSITE

USA Label ID set

Default

Character

1

QR s

$T

$P

$L

$M

$X

$V

$R

$U

$W a

$K

@

P

E

E

E

E

A

A

A

A

Default

ASCII

245000

244C00

244D00

245800

310000

515200

730000

245400

400000

500000

610000

244B00

245600

245200

245500

245700

410000

410000

410000

410000

450000

450000

450000

450000

Data Editing

EU Label ID set

Default

Character

P

$T

1 y

$P

$L

$M

$X

$V

$R

$U

$W a

$K

Z r

I

$J

D

H

G

$H

C

F

Default

ASCII

245000

244C00

244D00

245800

310000

790000

500000

245400

5A0000

720000

610000

244B00

245600

245200

245500

245700

430000

460000

470000

244800

440000

480000

490000

244A00

Product Reference Guide 271

References

Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology

To configure a Label ID individually for a single symbology:

1. Go to

page 81

and scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code.

2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE (Enable as Prefix) or AFTER (Enable as suf-

fix) by scanning the appropriate bar code in the section "Label ID Control" on page 81.

Reference Figure 18 for Label ID positioning options if multiple identification features are enabled.

3. Scan a bar code to select the symbology for which you wish to configure a custom Label

ID from the section "Label ID Symbology Selection • 1D Symbologies" on page 82.

4. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will represent the

Label ID for the selected symbology.

5. Turn to the ASCII Chart

on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits associated with your choice of Label ID. For example, if you wish to select an equal sign (=) as a Label ID, the chart indicates its associated hex characters as 3D. Turn to

"Keypad" starting on page 317 and scan the bar codes representing the hex characters

determined. For the example given, the characters ‘3’ and ‘D’ would be scanned. More examples of Label ID settings are provided in

Table 36 .

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to exit Label ID entry.

7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again to exit Programming Mode.

This completes the steps to configure a Label ID for a given symbology.

Figure 18. Label ID Position Options

Prefix Label ID Aim ID

OR

Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

272 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Editing

Table 36. Label ID Examples

STEP ACTION

1.

Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code

2.

3.

EXAMPLES

Determine placement of the

Label ID characters BEFORE or

AFTER with regard to scanned

data using "Label ID

Control" starting on page 81

Enable as Prefix Enable as Suffix Enable as Prefix

Scan the bar code selecting the symbology type you wish to designate label ID

characters for using "Label ID

Symbology Selection • 1D

Symbologies" starting on page

82

.

DataBar

Omnidirectional

(Scanner enters Programming Mode)

Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5

Enable as Suffix

Code 32

4.

5.

Custom Label ID example

(desired characters):

Find hex equivalents from the

ASCII Chart

(inside back cover), then scan in these digits/characters using the bar codes in the section:

"Keypad" starting on page 317 .

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the

CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6.

Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code

7.

Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again

D B *

44 42 2A

= C 3

3D 43 33

+

2B

(Scanner exits Label ID entry)

(Scanner exits Programming Mode)

P H

50 48

Result:

DB*[bar code data]

[bar code data]=C3

+[bar code data] [bar code data]PH

Product Reference Guide 273

References

Character Conversion

Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.

For example, if you have the character conversion configuration item set to the following:

41423132FFFFFFFF

The first pair is 4142 or AB (41 hex is an ASCII capital A, 42 hex is an ASCII capital B) and the second pair is 3132 or 12 (31 hex is an ASCII 1, 32 is an ASCII 2). The other two pairs are

FFFF and FFFF.

With the label, AB12BA21, it would look as follows after the character conversion: BB22BB22.

The A characters were converted to B characters and the 1 characters were converted to 2 characters. Nothing is done with the last two character pairs, since they are all FF.

To set Character Conversion:

1. Go to

page 88

and scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code.

2. Scan the “Configure Character Conversion” bar code.

3. Determine the desired string. Sixteen positions must be determined as in the above exam-

ple. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart

on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits needed to fulfill the string.

4. Turn to Appendix D, Keypad

and scan the bar codes representing the hex characters determined in the previous step.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to exit Programming Mode.

If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/

EXIT bar code twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.

274 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Reading Parameters

Label Gone Timeout

This feature sets the time after the last label segment is seen before the reader prepares for a new label. The timeout can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (2.55 seconds) in 10ms increments. Label Gone Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull for each label that is read

Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Go to

page 92

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a

two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 37 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 37. Label Gone Timeout Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes)

50ms

005

150ms

015

EXAMPLES

1800ms (1.8 sec.) 2550ms (2.55 sec.)

180

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING

Scan Three Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

255

‘‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

Product Reference Guide 275

References

Good Read LED Duration

This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (0.001 to 2.55 seconds) in 100ms increments.

Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds. A setting of 0 means that the good read

LED stays on until the next time the trigger is pulled.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 000, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Go to page 96

and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter

Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

This completes the procedure. See

Table 38 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 38. Good Read LED Duration Setting Examples

ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting

Good Read LED stays on until next trigger pull (00)

20ms 150ms

Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes)

000 002 015

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING

Scan Three Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

2550ms (2.55 sec.)

255

‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

276 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Scanning Features

Scanning Features

Scan Mode

This mode is associated with typical handheld reader operation. Selects the scan operating mode for the reader. The following selections are valid for all models:

Trigger Single: When the trigger is pulled, scanning is activated until one of the following occurs:

-

Scanning Active Time

has elapsed

- a label has been read

- the trigger is released

Trigger Hold Multiple: When the trigger is pulled, scanning starts and the product scans until

the trigger is released or Scanning Active Time has elapsed. Reading a label does not disable

scanning.

Double Read Timeout

prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.

Trigger Pulse Multiple: When the trigger is pulled, continuous scanning is activated until

Scanning Active Time has elapsed or the trigger has been released and pulled again.

Double

Read Timeout

prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.

Flashing: The reader flashes on and off regardless of the trigger status. Flash rate is controlled by

Flash On Time and Flash Off Time

. When Flash is ON the imager reads continuously; when

Flash is OFF scanning is deactivated.

Always On: No trigger pull is required to read a bar code. Scanning is continually on. If the trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it is in Trigger Single Mode.

Double Read Timeout

prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.

Stand Mode: No trigger pull is required to read a bar code. Scanning is turned on automatically when an item is placed in the reader’s field of view. If the trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it

in single read mode. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads while in this

mode.

Product Reference Guide 277

References

Stand Mode Off Time

This feature specifies the amount of time reader illumination stays off after pulling the trigger when in Stand Mode. The configurable range is 01 to 32 by 01 in increments of 500ms (500ms to 16 seconds).

Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to

page 101 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to

enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: Set Stand Mode Illuminator Off Time.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 39 for some examples of how to set this feature.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table 39. Stand Mode Off Time

ACTION

Desired Setting

Pad leading zero

500 ms 1 Second

EXAMPLES

5.5 Seconds

01 02

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

11

Scan SELECT STAND MODE OFF TIME

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘1’ and ‘1’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

16 Seconds

32

‘3’ and ‘2’

278 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Scanning Features

Scanning Active Time

This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments.

Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20

= 020, etc.

3. Go to

page 101 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to

enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad , that represent

the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 40 for some examples of how to set this feature.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table 40. Scanning Active Time Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Pad leading zero(es)

1 Second

001

90 Sec. (1.5 min.) 180 Sec. (3 min.) 255 Seconds (4.25 min.)

090

EXAMPLES

180

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING

Scan Three Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’ ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

255

‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

Product Reference Guide 279

References

Aiming Duration Time

Specifies the frame of time the aiming pointer remains on after decoding a label, when in trigger single mode. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments.

Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20

= 020, etc.

3. Go to

page 104 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to

enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT AIMING DURATION TIME SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad , that represent

the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 41 for some examples of how to set this feature.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table 41. Aiming Duration Time Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Pad leading zero(es)

1 Second

001

90 Sec. (1.5 min.) 180 Sec. (3 min.) 255 Seconds (4.25 min.)

090

EXAMPLES

180

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT AIMING DURATION TIME SETTING

Scan Three Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’ ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

255

‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

280 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Scanning Features

Flash On Time

This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.

Follow these instructions to set this feature.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to

page 102 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to

enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad

representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 42 for examples of how to set this feature.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table 42. Flash On Time Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Divide by 100 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits)

500ms

05

EXAMPLES

1,000ms (1 sec.) 5200ms (5.2 sec.)

10 52

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘5’ and ‘2’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

9,900ms (9.9 sec.)

99

‘9’ and ‘9’

Product Reference Guide 281

References

Flash Off Time

This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.

Follow these instructions to set this feature.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to

page 103 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to

enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 43 for some examples of how to set this feature.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table 43. Flash Off Time Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Divide by 100 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits)

500ms

05

EXAMPLES

1,000ms (1 sec.) 5200ms (5.2 sec.)

10 52

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘5’ and ‘2’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

9,900ms (9.9 sec.)

99

‘9’ and ‘9’

282 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Scanning Features

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology

This feature Specifies the transmission ordering by symbology type, when Multiple Labels per

Frame is enabled.Up to six symbologies can be selected. Zeroes must be added to pad the string to 12 characters if not using all six symbologies.

The labels are ordered first as specified in the output mask. Labels present in the volume but not specified will be transmitted as unspecified symbologies in random order as allowed by the reading time sequence. For each label decoded in the volume the reader signals the standard beeper and LED indications.

To specify the symbology order:

1. Determine the symbologies and order you want to specify.

2. Use Table 45 on page 284 to find the

hex values for up to six symbologies.

3. Go to

page 108 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to

enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: “SELECT SYMBOLOGIES FOR MULTIPLE LABELS ORDER-

ING”.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad , that represent the desired character/value in step 2 above.

6. Scan zeroes if needed to make a 12-character string.

7. When finished, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 44 for some examples of how to set this feature.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table 44. Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology Examples

ACTION

Desired symbology Code 39 Data Matrix

EXAMPLES

Code 128

Hex equivalent from

Table 45

24 0E

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

0C

Aztec

4E

Scan SELECT SYMBOLOGIES FOR MULTIPLE LABELS ORDERING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

RESULT

‘2’ and ‘4’

0x240E0C4E0000

‘0’ and ‘E’ ‘0’ and ‘C’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

‘4’ and ‘E’

Table 45 on page 284

shows the hex value associated with each symbology.

Product Reference Guide 283

References

284

Table 45. Symbology Hex Values

Hex

Value Symbology ID

00 Don't care

01

02

03

04

UPC-A

UPC-E

EAN8

EAN13

05

06

07

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

UPC2

UPC5

C128_ADDON

EAN128

C128_PROGRAMMING_LABEL

CODE128

FNC3_C128_LABEL

DATA MATRIX

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

MAXICODE

QRCODE

Reserved

Reserved

CODE49

UPC-E2

UPC-E5

Reserved

UPC-A2

UPC-A5

Reserved

EAN82

EAN85

Reserved

EAN132

EAN135

1F

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

EAN138

ISBN_ID

TWO_LABEL_PAIR

I2OF5

CODABAR

CODE39

PHARMAC39

MSI_PLESSEY

CODE93

RSS_EXP_ID

RSS_14_ID

GTIN

GTIN2

Hex

Value Symbology ID

2C GTIN5

2D

2E

2F

30

GTIN8

S2OF5

PDF417

CODE11

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

IATA

MICRO_PDF

GS1 DataBar_LIM_ID

GS1 DataBar_LIM_COMP

GS1 DataBar_Omnidirectional_COMP

GS1 DataBar_EXP_COMP

GENERIC_DATA

CC_A

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

40

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

CC_B

CC_C

LABELIMAGE

CAPTURE_IMAGE_LABEL

Reserved

M2OF5

D2OF5

PLESSEY65

ISSN

ISBT

Reserved

TIMER_EXPIRED_EVENT

FOLLETT_2OF5

Reserved

Reserved

CODE39_CIP

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

50

51

52

53

54

55

FF

ABC_CODABAR

I2OF5_CIP

C2OF5

IND2OF5

AZTEC

UPC-E_COMP

UPC-A_COMP

EAN8_COMP

EAN13_COMP

EAN128_COMP

DATA MATRIX_PROGRAMMING_LABEL

LABEL_ID_MAX

INVALID_LABEL_TYPE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RF Features

RF Features

Automatic Configuration Update

When this feature is enabled, the base station and reader will keep their configurations synchronized. If a reader's configuration is altered by reading programming labels, this change is automatically transferred and updated in a linked base station. Likewise, if the base station's configuration is changed using Aladdin or by host commands, then the reader's configuration will automatically be updated if this feature is enabled.

RF Address Stamping

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio address when address stamping is enabled.

This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on page 243 is enabled.

Follow these instructions to select the delimiter character:

1. Determine the desired character, then find its hexadecimal equivalent on the

ASCII Chart

on the inside back cover. A setting of 00 specifies no delimiter character.

2. Go to

page 244 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to

enter Programming Mode.

3. Scan the bar code: SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMITER CHARACTER.

4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the hexadecimal characters which were determined in the steps above. You will hear a twobeep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

Table 46. Source Radio Address Delimiter Character Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES

No delimiter character

, (comma) - (dash)

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMiTER CHARACTER

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘2’ and ‘C’ ‘2’ and ‘D’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

/ (slash)

‘2’ AND ‘F’

Product Reference Guide 285

References

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and

Base Station is considered failed.

When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds.

Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 = 05, 25 =

25, etc

3. Go to page 249

and scanScan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the barcode: SELECT RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See Table 47 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 47. STAR Radio Protocol Timeout Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting 2 Seconds 5 Seconds

EXAMPLES

10 Seconds

Pad with leading zero(es) 02 05

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

10

Scan SELECTSTAR RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT SETTING

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

25 Seconds

25

‘2’ AND ‘5’

286 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RF Features

BT-Only Features

BT Pin Code

This option specifies the 4-character or 16-character pin code to be used for authentication of the BT link. To set the pin code:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode, then enable "BT Security Mode" on page 245.

2. Specify the desired pin code length (4 or 16) by scanning the appropriate bar code in

"Select PIN Code Length" on page 246.

3. Determine the desired characters. For example, D254 or STOR12345678135M

4. Convert the characters to hexadecimal using the ASCII Chart

on the inside back cover of this manual.

5. Go to

page 246 and Scan the bar code: SET 4 CHAR PIN CODE or SET 16-CHAR

PIN CODE.

6. Scan the appropriate alphanumeric characters from the keypad in

Appendix D, Keypad ,

representing the hexadecimal entries determined in the steps above. You will hear a twobeep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

Changing the pin code setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled setting, the Pin Code setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin.

After the Base Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.

Table 48. BT Pin Code Setting Examples

STEP

1

2

ACTION

Desired Setting

Convert the characters to hexadecimal

3

4

5

Scan 8 or 32 Alphanumeric

Characters From

Appendix

D, Keypad

6

D254

44 32 35 34

EXAMPLES

STOR12345678135M

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SET BT PIN CODE

44323534

53 54 4F 52 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 31 33 35 4D

53544F5231323334353637383133354D

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 287

References

Motion Features

Motionless Timeout

This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader takes to assume that it is in a motionless condition. The range for this setting is from 500 msec to 25.5 seconds, in 100 millisecond increments.

Follow these instructions to set this feature.

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0.5 = 0005 = 00, 5 =

050, 20 = 200, etc.

3. Go to

page 252 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to

enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT MOTIONLESS TIMEOUT SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad

representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming

Mode.

This completes the procedure. See

Table 49 for examples of how to set this feature.

STEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table 49. Motionless Timeout Setting Examples

ACTION

Desired Setting

Divide by 100 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits)

500ms

005

1 sec.

010

EXAMPLES

10 sec

100

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scan SELECT MOTIONLESS TIMEOUT SETTING

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘1’, ‘0’, and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

9,900ms (9.9 sec.)

250

‘2’, ‘5’, and ‘0’

288 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 5

Message Formatting

Message Formatting

Message Formatting is only available for the Gryphon™ Wireless model.

A message from the Host to the base must follow these rules:

• If Address stamping options or address delimiter are enabled on the base, the Host replay must have address field and delimiter too. Otherwise the message will be ignored. Address delimiter is present only when address stamping is enabled.

• Address stamping is necessary to correctly route the message to the Gryphon I, especially when more than one handheld is linked to the same base. Address stamping could be disabled if the system is in point to point configuration. If address stamping is not enabled, the messages are addressed to the first handheld linked to the base.

• Messages end with “CR” 0x0D ASCII character. The CR character cannot be contained in the middle.

• Messages cannot start with '$' or # because these are reserved for Service mode command

• Base station can receive host message only if Host Commands Obey/Ignore is set to

Ignore.

• Message could be sent to the HH in response to a Label when “Transmit mode” require

Ack from Host (see transmit mode parameter) or at any time. When messages are sent not in response to a label must start with DC2 0x12 ASCII character and could be sent in any transmit mode setting.

• Message could be sent to all HH linked to base by using a Multicast message: 

“00 00 00 00 2A AA”

• In order to receive a message, handhelds must not be in sleep state.

The format of the ACK from Host message (used for transmission mode 02) is:

[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] MESSAGE <CR>

The format of a generic message From Host to HH is:

[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] DC2 MESSAGE <CR> where DC2 is ASCII 0x12 (^R) character.

[Items in square brackets are optional.]

Product Reference Guide 289

Message Formatting

• If you want to control the Scanner's beeper from the host, you will also probably want to disable the good transmission beep that is emitted when the code is received from the cra-

dle. (See " Wireless Beeper Features" on page 234

).

The message field can store plain text and escape sequences.

• Escape sequences are interpreted as commands.

LED and Beeper Control

ESC [ 0 q

ESC [ 1 q

ESC [ 2 q

ESC [ 3 q

ESC [ 4 q

ESC [ 5 q

ESC [ 6 q

ESC [ 7 q

ESC [ 8 q

ESC [ 9 q

ESC [ 0 r

ESC [ 1 r

Emit short High tone + short delay

Emit short Low tone + short delay

Emit long Low tone + short delay

Emit good read tone

Emit bad tx tone

Wait 100 ms

Turn on the green LED

Turn off the green LED

Turn on the green spot

Turn off the green spot

Beep for Find me function (new)

Power-off (new)

The LED control escape sequences are intended to activate the LEDs for short periods of time and can be used in combination with the Beeper. The LED and Beeper will be controlled by the system after the entire command sequence is interpreted.

Example:

ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 3 q ESC [ 7 q

ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 5 q ESC [ 7 q

Turns on the green LED, emits a good read tone, and turns off the green LED.

Turns on the green LED for 100 ms and then turns off the green LED.

Escape sequences different from those listed will be ignored.

290 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix A

Technical Specifications

Item

Table 50 contains Physical and Performance Characteristics, User Environment and Regulatory

information. Table 51 provides Standard Cable Pinouts.

Table 50. Technical Specifications

Description

GD44XX GBT4400/GM440X

Physical Characteristics

Color

Dimensions

Weight (without cable)

Height 7.1”/181 mm

Length 3.9”/100 mm

Width 2.8”/71 mm

White or Black

Approximately 6.9 ounces /195.6 g

Height 7.1”/181 mm

Length 3.9”/100 mm

Width 2.8”/71 mm

GBT4400/GM440X Handheld Unit:

Approximately 8.7 ounces/246 g

Base Station/Charger: Approximately

8.7 ounces/246 g

Electrical Characteristics

Battery Type

Typical charge time for full charge from full discharge

N/A

N/A

Operating autonomy 

(continuous reading)

Base Station Consumption and DC input supply range

N/A

N/A

N/A

Li-Ion battery pack

4 hours with external power supply adapter a

16 hours with Host power

(In this case no supply adapter is needed) a scans typical/fully charged battery

GBT4400 >50,000 reads

GM440X 60,000 reads (typical)

Volt 4.75-14 VDC; Power <8W b

;

Imax 500mA when in host/bus powered mode b

Product Reference Guide

291

Performance Characteristics

Scanning Illumination

Source

Aiming Source

Roll (Tilt) Angle c

Pitch Angle c

Skew (Yaw) Angle c

Field of View

Item

Depth of Field (Typical) d

Description

LEDs

Laser Class 2

Up to ± 180°

± 40°

± 40°

40° Hx26° V

Code 39

EAN

PDF 417

Data Matrix

QR Code

Symbology

Minimum Element Width

Print Contrast Minimum

Standard Range (SR) Models

433, 910, BT, D

5mil: 1.6” -7.5” (4.0 -19cm)

10mil: 0.4” - 11.8” (1.0 - 30cm)

20mil: up to 17.7” (up to 45cm)

7.5mil: 0.5” - 10.6” (2.0 - 27cm)

13mil: 0.6” - 15.7” (1.5 - 40cm)

6.6mil: 1.0” - 5.9” (2.5 - 15cm)

10mil: 0.2” - 8.6” (0.5 - 22cm)

15mil: 0.6” - 13.4” (1.5 - 34cm)

10mil: 0.8” to 6.3” (2.0 - 16cm)

15mil: 0” to 9.3” (0 - 23.6cm)

High Density (HD) Models

BT, D only

3mil: 0.9” - 3.6” (2.4 - 9.1cm)

5 mil: 0.3” - 4.5” (0.8 -11.3cm)

7.5mil: 0” - 5” (0 - 12.7cm)

13mil: 4.3” - 6.8” (1.1- 17.2cm)

4mil: 0.7” - 2.7” (1.8 - 6.8cm)

6.6mil: 0.1” - 4.4” (0.1 - 11.2cm)

10mil: 0” - 5.6” (0 - 14.3cm)

5mil: 1.1” - 2.4” (2.8-6.1cm)

10mil: 1.2” to 4.9” (3.0 - 12.5cm)

15mil: 0.4” to 7.5” (1.0 - 19cm)

6.7mil: 0.8” - 1.7” (2.1 - 4.2cm)

Standard Range:

1D Minimum Resolution = 4 mil

PDF-417 Minimum Resolution = 5 mil

Data Matrix Minimum Resolution = 7 mil

High Density:

1D Minimum Resolution = 2.5 mil

PDF-417 Minimum Resolution = 4 mil

Data Matrix Minimum Resolution = 5 mil

25% minimum reflectance

292 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Item

Decode Capability

Interfaces Supported f

Description

1D Bar Codes

UPC/EAN/JAN (A, E, 13, 8); UPC/EAN/JAN (including P2 /P5); UPC/EAN/JAN (including;

ISBN /Bookland & ISSN); UPC/EAN Coupons; Code 39 (including full ASCII); Code 39 Trioptic; Code39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical); LOGMARS (Code 39 w/ standard check digit enabled); Danish PPT; Code 32 (Italian Pharmacode 39); Code 128; Code 128 ISBT; Interleaved 2 of 5; Standard 2 of 5; Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP (HR); Industrial 2 of 5; Discrete 2 of

5; IATA 2of5 Air cargo code; Code 11; Codabar; ABC Codabar; Code 93; MSI; PZN; Plessey;

Anker Plessey; Follett 2 of 5; GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional; GS1 DataBar Limited; GS1

DataBar Expanded; GS1 DataBar Truncated; DATABAR Expanded Coupon.

2D / Stacked Codes

The Gryphon I GBT4400 scanner is capable of decoding the following symbologies using multiple frames (i.e. Multi-Frame Decoding): PDF-417; QR Code; Aztec; Data

Matrix; Inverse Data Matrix; Data Matrix is configurable for the following parameters:;

Normal or Inverted; Square or Rectangular Style; Data length (1 - 3600 characters); Maxicode; QR Codes (QR and Multiple QR Codes); Aztec; Postal Codes; Australian Post; Japanese Post; KIX Post; Planet Code; Postnet; Royal Mail Code (RM45CC); Intelligent Mail Bar

Code (IMB); Sweden Post; Portugal Post; LaPoste A/R 39; 4-State Canada; PDF-417;

Micro PDF417; GS1 Composites (1 - 12); French CIP13 e

; GS1 DataBar Stacked; GS1 Data-

Bar Stacked Omnidirectional; GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked; GSI Databar Composites;

Chinese Sensible Code; Inverted 2D codes.

Note: The reader can apply the Normal/Reverse Decoding Control to the following symbologies: Data Matrix, QR, Aztec and Chinese Sensible Code.

RS-232 Std, RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf, RS-232 OPOS, IBM 46xx (ports5B and 9B), USB Com

Std., USB Keyboard, USB Alternate Keyboard, USB OEM, Keyboard Wedge (AT with or w/ o Alternate Key, IBM AT PS2 with or w/o Alternate Key, PC-XT, IBM 3153, IBM Terminals

31xx, 32xx,34xx, 37xx make only and make break keyboard, Digital Terminals VT2x,

VT3xx, VT4xx, and Apple) and Wand Emulation (BT model only).

a. Charge Times are much lower when battery is within daily typical operating condition.

b. Typical input current measured under factory default configuration.

c. Based on ISO 15423 specifications d. 13 mils DOF based on EAN. All other 1D codes are Code 39. All labels grade A, typical environmental light,

20°C, label inclination 10° e. It is acceptable to handle this with ULE.

f. See "Interface Selection"on page

29

for a listing of available interface sets by model type.

Product Reference Guide

293

294

Item Description

User Environment

Operating Temperature

Charging Temperature

Storage Temperature

Humidity

Drop Specifications

Ambient Light

Immunity

Contaminants

Spray/Rain/

Dust/Particulates

ESD Level

Regulatory

Electrical Safety

EMI/RFI

Laser Safety

GD44XX Models

32° to 131° F (0° to 55°

C)

N/A

IEC 529-IP52

16 KV

GBT Models

32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)

32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)

-4° to 158° F (-20° to 70° C)

Operating: 5% to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing

Scanner withstands 18 drops from 1.8 meters (5.9 feet) to concrete

Up to 100,000 Lux

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, IEC 60950

GD44XX Models

North America (FCC) :

Part 15 Class B; Canada (

IC) : ICES-003 Class B;

Russia ( Gost); European

Union EMC Directive;

VCCI-Japan; Korean KCC;

Taiwan EMC (BSMI); 

Australia (ACMA)

GBT Models

Europe - CE; Australia -

C-tick; Russia – GOST;

USA/CANADA – FCC/IC;

Japan – JRF/VCCI; Mexico - NOM + Cofetel;

South Korea - KCC; Brazil - ANATEL; Argentina -

CNC; China - SRRC;

Malaysia - SIRIM; Indonesia, Singapore - IDA;

Taiwan - NCC; Philippines - NTC

GM44 433 Models

Europe - CE; Australia -

C-tick; Russia – GOST;

Singapore - IDA; China -

SRRC; Brazil - ANATEL

USA/CANADA – FCC/IC;

Mexico - NOM + Cofetel;

GM44 910 Models

IEC Class 2

Radiation 1 mW Avg., Emitted wavelength 650 nm, 12ms pulse, Beam Divergence 8.4 deg x 8.1 deg ("plus" pattern).

Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Imager Labeling

Sample labels are shown for illustrative purposes only. Please view the labels on your product for actual details, as they may vary from those depicted.

Scanner Regulatory Label

Base Station Label

PATENTS PENDING

C

239045

US

Radio Features

Radio Features BT 433 model

Frequency Range 2400 to 2483.5 MHz 433.92 MHz

Range (in open air) 30m 30m

910 model

910.00 MHz

30m

For Star Models: Max number of devices per base station = 16

Product Reference Guide

295

Standard Cable Pinouts

Figure 19 , Figure 20

and Table 51

provide standard pinout information for the interface cable.

Figure 19. Standard Cable Pinouts: Handheld

Pin 1

Interface Cable Port

Bottom of Scanner

Cable Strain Relief

Pin 10

To Host

Cable Clip (Latch)

Cable

Figure 20. Standard Cable Pinouts: Base Station

1 2

4

8

6

7

3 5

The signal descriptions in Table 51 apply to the connector on the reader and are for reference

only.

296 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Pin

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Table 51.

Standard Cable Pinouts — Handheld (GD44XX model) or Base Station (GBT4400 and GM44XX Star models) Side

RS-232

RTS (out)

OEM USB Keyboard Wedge

GND

RX

TX

VCC

CTS (in)

GND

VCC

IBM_B

IBM_A

D+

D-

GND

VCC

CLKIN (KBD side)

DATAIN (KBD side)

GND

VCC

CLKOUT (PC side)

DATAOUT (PC side)

Product Reference Guide

297

LED and Beeper Indications

The reader’s beeper sounds and its LED illuminates to indicate various functions or errors on the reader. An optional “Green Spot” also performs useful functions. The tables below list these indications. One exception to the behaviors listed in the tables is that the reader’s functions are programmable, and may or may not be turned on. For example, certain indications such as the power-up beep can be disabled using programming bar code labels.

Table 52. LED and Beeper Indications

INDICATION DESCRIPTION LED BEEPER

Power-up Beep

The reader is in the process of powering-up.

Good Read Beep

Image Capture

A label has been successfully scanned by the reader.

When ready to capture image

LED behavior for this indication is configurable via the feature “

Good Read:

When to Indicate

ROM Failure

Limited Scanning

Label Read

Reader Active

Mode

Reader

Disabled

Green Spot is on continuously

Green Spot a flashes momentarily

There is an error in the reader's software/programming

Indicates that a host connection is not established when the IBM or USB interface is enabled.

The reader is active and ready to scan.

The reader has been disabled by the host.

While in Stand Mode or Trigger

Stand Mode the green spot shall be on while in stand watch state.

Upon successful read of a label, the software shall turn the green spot on for the time specified by the configured value.

Flashes

N/A

The LED is lit steadily a

The LED blinks continuously

N/A

N/A

Blue light flashes 2 times when updating

Reader beeps four times at highest frequency and volume upon power-up.

The reader will beep once at current frequency, volume, mono/ bi-tonal setting and duration upon a successful label scan.

Reader sounds one error beep at highest volume.

Reader 'chirps' six times at the highest frequency and current volume.

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A a. Except when in sleep mode or when a

Good Read LED Duration other than 00 is selected

298 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Table 53. Programming Mode Indications

Programming Mode - The following indications ONLY occur when the reader is in Programming Mode.

Label Programming Mode Entry

A valid programming label has been scanned.

LED blinks continuously

Reader sounds four low frequency beeps.

Label Programming Mode

Rejection of Label

A label has been rejected.

N/A

Reader sounds three times at lowest frequency & current volume.

Label Programming Mode

Acceptance of

Partial Label

Label Programming Mode

Acceptance of

Programming

Label Programming Mode Cancel Item Entry

In cases where multiple labels must be scanned to program one feature, this indication acknowledges each portion as it is successfully scanned.

Configuration option(s) have been successfully programmed via labels and the reader has exited Programming Mode.

Cancel label has been scanned.

N/A

N/A

N/A

Reader sounds one short beep at highest frequency & current volume.

Reader sounds one high frequency beep and 4 low frequency beeps followed by reset beeps.

Reader sounds two times at low frequency and current volume.

Error Codes

Upon startup, if the reader sounds a long tone, this means the reader has not passed its automatic Selftest and has entered FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) isolation mode. If the reader is reset, the sequence will be repeated. The following table describes the LED flashes/beep codes associated with an error found.

NUMBER OF LED

FLASHES/BEEPS

6

12

1

2

15

ERROR

All Models:

GD44XX, GBT4400, GM44XX

Configuration

Interface PCB

Digital PCB

Imager

Accelerometer

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Contact Helpdesk for assistance

Product Reference Guide

299

Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY)

INDICATION LEDS

Power-up Complete

Reader Disabled by the HOST or the communication with HOST is not established

Data/labels are transmitted to the HOST

Programming Mode

Configuration alignment with the handheld is in progress

Battery charging in progress

Battery charging complete

Battery charger error

No handheld is placed on the cradle

Yellow LED on

Yellow LED blinking ~1Hz

Yellow LEDs turned off for 100mSec

Yellow LED blinks quickly

Red LED blinks quickly

Red LED on

Green LED on

Green LED and Red LEDs blink alternatively

~1Hz

Red and Green LEDs off

Base Station Button Indicators

BUTTON PUSH

EVENT

Push at power-up

< 1 sec (*)

1 to 5 sec

5 to 10 sec

10 to 15 sec

15 to 20 sec

> 20 sec

CORDLESS force device connection

(Aladdin)

UV LED On/Off

Paging

Unlink (Only BT)

Reset

Restore custom defaults

No action

RED

INDICATOR(**)

Off

Off

Off

Off

Fast blink

Slow blink

Off

GREEN

INDICATOR(**)

Slow blink

Fast blink

Off

Fast blink

Slow blink

Off

Off

Off

*Only for models with UV Counterfeit Money Detector, see page 13 for more details.

300 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix B

Standard Defaults

The most common configuration settings are listed in the “Default” column of the table below.

Page references are also provided for feature descriptions and programming bar codes for each parameter. A column has also been provided for recording of your preferred default settings for these same configurable features.

Table 54. Standard Defaults

Parameter Default Your Setting

Page

Number

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore

USB Suspend Mode

RS-232 ONLY

Baud Rate

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

Handshaking Control

RS-232/USB-Com

Intercharacter Delay

Beep On ASCII BEL

Beep On Not on File

ACK NAK Options

ACK Character

NAK Character

ACK NAK Timeout Value

ACK NAK Retry Count

ACK NAK Error Handling

Indicate Transmission Failure

Obey

Disable

9600

8 Data Bits

1 Stop Bit

None

RTS

No Delay

Disable

Enable

Disable

‘ACK’

‘NAK’

200 ms

3 Retries

Ignore Errors Detected

Enable

39

39

50

50

51

51

47

47

48

49

52

52

42

43

43

44

45

Product Reference Guide

301

Parameter

Disable Character

Enable Character

KEYBOARD WEDGE

Country Mode

Send Control Characters

Wedge Quiet Interval

Intercode Delay

Caps Lock State

Numlock

USB Keyboard Speed

USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad

USB-OEM

USB-OEM Device Usage

Interface Options

IBM 46xx

46xx Number of Host Resets

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format

Interface Options

Wand Emulation (BT model only)

Wand Signal Speed

Wand Polarity

Wand Idle State

Transmit Noise

Label Symbology Conversion

Data Format

Global Prefix/Suffix

Global AIM ID

302

Default

‘D’

‘E’

Your Setting

Page

Number

53

53

U.S. Keyboard

00

100 ms

No Delay

Caps Lock OFF

NumLock Key

Unchanged

1 ms

Standard Keys

Handheld

Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

6

IBM Standard Format

Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

660 ms

Quiet Zones & Spaces

High, Bars Low

High

Disable

No conversion

68

70

70

72

72

73

73

74

No Global Prefix

Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)

Disable

76

77

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

56

60

61

61

62

62

62

64

66

66

Parameter

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128

Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets

Individually Set Label ID

Case Conversion

Character Conversion

READING PARAMETERS

Double Read Timeout

Power On Alert

Good Read: When to Indicate

Good Read Beep Type

Good Read Beep Frequency

Good Read Beep Length

Good Read Beep Volume

Good Read LED Duration

Scanning Features

Scan Mode

Stand Mode Indication

Stand Operation

Pick Mode

Stand Mode Sensitivity

Stand Mode Illumination Off Time

Scanning Active Time

Stand Illumination Control

Flash On Time

Flash Off Time

Aiming Pointer

Aiming Duration Timer

Green Spot Duration

Mobile Phone Mode

Product Reference Guide

Default

Enable

EU Set

Disable

Disable

No Char Conversion

Your Setting

Page

Number

79

80

81

87

88

0.6 Second

Power-up Beep

After Decode

Mono

High

80 ms

High

300 ms

Trigger Single

Disable

Switch to Stand Mode

Disable

Medium

2 Seconds

5 Seconds

OFF

10 = Flash is ON for 1

Second

06 = Flash is OFF for

600ms

Enable

Aiming Off

After Decoding

300 ms

Enable

103

104

104

105

105

303

100

101

101

102

97

98

99

100

103

93

93

94

95

96

89

92

92

Parameter

Partial Label Reading Control

Decode Negative Image

Multiple Label Reading

Multiple Labels per Frame

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length

CODE SELECTION - 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code EAN/UPC

Coupon Control

UPC-A

UPC-A Enable/Disable

UPC-A Check Character Transmission

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission

UPC-A 2D Component

UPC-E

UPC-E Enable/Disable

UPC-E Check Character Transmission

UPC-E 2D Component

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission

GTIN

GTIN Formatting

EAN 13 (Jan 13)

EAN 13 Enable/Disable

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character

304

Default

Enable

Disable

Disable

Random Order

Disable

Your Setting

Page

Number

106

106

107

108

108

Enable only UPCA coupon decoding

Enable

Send

Don’t Expand

Transmit

2D Component Not

Required

Enable

Send

2D Component Not

Required

Don’t Expand

Don’t Expand

Transmit

Disable

Enable

Send

Transmit

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

111

112

112

113

113

114

117

118

118

119

114

115

115

116

116

117

Parameter

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion

EAN-13 2D Component

ISSN

ISSN Enable/Disable

EAN 8

EAN 8 Enable/Disable

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13

EAN 8 2D Component

UPC/EAN Global Settings

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones

Add-Ons

Optional Add-ons

Optional Add-On Timer

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer

Code 39

Code 39 Enable/Disable

Code 39 Check Character Calculation

Code 39 Check Character Transmission

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission

Code 39 Full ASCII

Code 39 Quiet Zones

Code 39 Length Control

Code 39 Set Length 1

Code 39 Set Length 2

Trioptic Code

Trioptic Code Enable/Disable

Product Reference Guide

Default

Disable

2D Component Not

Required

Your Setting

Page

Number

119

120

Disable

Enable

Send

Disable

2D Component Not

Required

120

121

121

122

122

Disable

Two Modules

Disable P2, P5 and P8

70 ms

Disable

Enable

Calculate Std Check

Send

Don’t Transmit

Disable

Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Variable

2

50

Disable

132

132

133

134

134

135

135

136

137

138

123

124

125

126

129

305

Parameter

Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code)

Code 32 Enable/Disable

Code 32 Check Char Transmission

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission

Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical Code)

Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable

Special Codes

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable

Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable

Code 128

Code 128 Enable/Disable

Expand Code 128 to Code 39

Code 128 Check Character Transmission

Code 128 Function Character Transmission

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission

Code 128 Quiet Zones

Code 128 Length Control

Code 128 Set Length 1

Code 128 Set Length 2

GS1-128

GS1-128 Enable

GS1-128 2D Component

ISBT 128

ISBT 128 Concatenation

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout

Default

Disable

Don’t Send

Don’t Transmit

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Enable

Don’t Expand

Don’t Send

Don’t Send

Disable

Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Variable

1

80

Transmit in Code 128

Data Format

Disable

Disable

Disable

Static

200 msec

Your Setting

Page

Number

144

145

146

147

142

142

143

143

144

140

141

141

138

139

139

140

148

148

149

149

150

151

306 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Parameter

Interleaved 2 of 5

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

I 2 of 5 Length Control

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable

Follett 2 of 5

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

Standard 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2

Industrial 2 of 5

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2

Code IATA

IATA Enable/Disable

IATA Check Character Transmission

Codabar

Codabar Enable/Disable

Product Reference Guide

Default

Disable

Disable

Enable

Variable

1

50

Disable

Disable

Send

Variable

8

50

Disable

Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Send

Variable

6

50

Disable

Disable

Your Setting

Page

Number

163

164

165

162

162

163

158

158

159

159

160

161

166

166

167

157

157

154

155

156

152

153

154

307

Parameter Default

Codabar Check Character Calculation

Codabar Check Character Transmission

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match

Codabar Quiet Zones

Codabar Length Control

Codabar Set Length 1

Codabar Set Length 2

ABC Codabar

ABC Codabar

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation

Code 11

Code 11 Enable/Disable

Code 11 Check Character Calculation

Code 11 Check Character Transmission

Code 11 Length Control

Code 11 Set Length 1

Code 11 Set Length 2

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation

Don’t Calculate

Send

Transmit abcd/abcd

Don’t Require Match

Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Variable

3

50

Disable

Disable

Static

200 msec

Disable

Disable

Check C and K

Send

Variable

4

50

Disable

Disable

2D component not required

Disable

Disable

Your Setting

Page

Number

167

168

168

169

169

170

170

171

172

173

173

173

174

175

181

182

177

178

179

176

176

177

180

180

181

308 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Parameter

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2

GS1 DataBar™ Limited

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component

Code 93

Code 93 Enable/Disable

Code 93 Check Character Calculation

Code 93 Check Character Transmission

Code 93 Length Control

Code 93 Set Length 1

Code 93 Set Length 2

Code 93 Quiet Zones

MSI

MSI Enable/Disable

MSI Check Character Calculation

MSI Check Character Transmission

MSI Length Control

MSI Set Length 1

MSI Set Length 2

Plessey

Plessey Enable/Disable

Plessey Check Character Calculation

Plessey Check Character Transmission

Plessey Length Control

Product Reference Guide

Default

2D component not required

Variable

1

74

Your Setting

Page

Number

182

183

184

185

186

186

187

Disable

Disable

2D component not required

Disable

Enable Check C and K

Enable

Variable

1

50

Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Disable

Enable Mod10

Enable

Variable

1

50

Disable

Enable Plessey std. check char. verification

Enable

Variable

189

190

191

187

188

188

192

197

197

198

198

192

193

193

195

195

196

309

Parameter

Plessey Set Length 1

Plessey Set Length 2

CODE SELECTION - 2D SYMBOLOGIES

2D Maximum Decoding Time

2D Structured Append

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control

Aztec Code Enable / Disable

Aztec Code Length Control

Aztec Code Length Control

Aztec Code Set Length 1

China Sensible Code Enable / Disable

China Sensible Code Length Control

China Sensible Code Set Length 1

China Sensible Code Set Length 2

Data Matrix Enable / Disable

Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style

Data Matrix Length Control

Data Matrix Set Length 1

Data Matrix Set Length 2

Maxicode Enable / Disable

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission

Maxicode Length Control

Maxicode Set Length 1

Maxicode Set Length 2

PDF417 Enable / Disable

PDF417 Length Control

PDF417 Set Length 1

PDF417 Set Length 2

Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable

310

Default

1

50

Disable

Variable

1

0145

Enable

Variable

1

2,710

Disable

350msec

Disable

Normal

Disable

Enable

Variable

1

Disable

Variable

1

7,827

Enable

Both Square and

Rectangular style

Variable

1

3,116

Disable

Your Setting

Page

Number

199

200

204

204

205

207

202

203

203

204

207

208

209

210

210

213

214

214

215

211

211

212

213

216

216

217

218

219

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Parameter

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation

Micro PDF417 Length Control

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2

QR Code Enable / Disable

QR Code Length Control

QR Code Set Length 1

QR Code Set Length 2

Micro QR Code Enable/Disable

Micro QR Code Length Control

Micro QR Code Set Length 1

Micro QR Code Set Length 2

UCC Composite Enable / Disable

UCC Optional Composite Timer

Postal Code Selection

Postnet BB Control

WIRELESS Features

Good Transmission Beep

Beep Frequency

Beep Duration

Beep Volume

Disconnect Beep

Docking Beep

Leash Alarm

Automatic Configuration Update

Copy Configuration to Scanner

Copy Configuration to Base Station

Batch Mode

Send Batch

Erase Batch Memory

Product Reference Guide

Enable

N/A

N/A

Disable

N/A

N/A

Enable

Low

80 msec

High

Enable

Enable

Disable

Default

Micro PDF AIM ID and label type

Variable

1

0366

Enable

Variable

1

7,089

Disable

Variable

0001

0035

Disable

Timer Disabled

Disable all Postal codes

Disable

Your Setting

Page

Number

219

229

230

231

225

226

227

228

222

223

224

225

220

220

221

222

239

239

239

240

240

241

236

236

237

237

234

234

235

311

Parameter

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay

Direct Radio Autolink

Features for BT Models Only

Source Radio Address Transmission

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

Link Timeout

BT Security Features

BT Security Mode

Select PIN Code Length

Set PIN Code

BT Poll Rate

Powerdown Timeout

Features for Star Models Only

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

STAR Radio Transmit Mode

Motion Features

Motion Aiming Control

Motion Sensitivity

Motionless Timeout

Default

No Delay

Unlink Label Required

Your Setting

Page

Number

241

242

Do not include

No Delimiter Character

2 Seconds

Disable

4-character BT PIN Code

31323334 =

Default Pin Code is 1234

20 ms

30 minutes

2 seconds

ACK from cradle

Enable

Medium

2 seconds

245

246

246

247

248

243

244

244

249

250

251

252

252

312 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix C

Sample Bar Codes

The sample bar codes in this appendix are typical representations for their symbology types.

1D Bar Codes

UPC-A

EAN-13

978033029095

Code 39

Interleaved 2 of 5

Code 128

Code 128

Product Reference Guide

313

Sample Bar Codes — continued

Codabar

13579

Code 32

Code 93

Code 11

123456789

314 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GS1 DataBar™ (RSS)

GS1 DataBar™ variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see

GS1 DataBar™

Omnidirectional on page 180 ).

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Stacked

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

1234890hjio9900mnb

GS1 DataBar™-14

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Truncated

55432198673467

10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523

GS1 DataBar™ Limited

08672345650916

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

90876523412674

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

78123465709811

Product Reference Guide

315

316

Aztec

2D Bar Codes

Datamatrix

China Sensible Code MaxiCode

PDF 417

ABCabc

QR Code

35900G9

Micro PDF 417

BV17453

Micro QR Code

123456

UCC Composite

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix D

Keypad

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

0 1

2

3

4 5

6

8

7

9

Product Reference Guide

317

A

C

E

B

D

F

318 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix E

Scancode Tables

Control Character Emulation

Control character emulation selects from different scancode tables as listed in this appendix.

Each of the control character sets below are detailed by interface type in the tables. These apply to Wedge and USB Keyboard platforms.

Control Character 00 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 01 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Capital

Key, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 02 : Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to

0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table (Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 — See page -326.)

Single Press and Release Keys

In the following tables, Ar↓ means Alt right pressed and Ar↑ means Alt right released and so on.

Definitions for other keys are Al (Alt left ), Cr (Control Right ) Cl (Control Left ) Sh (shift).

This method can be used for combining Alt, Control or Shift with other keys.

Example: Consider a Control character set to 00. If AltRight+A is required before sending a label to the host, it could be done by setting three Prefix keys in this way: 0x99 0x41 0x9A.

Product Reference Guide 319

Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE

1x

2x

3x

4x

5x

6x

7x

8x

Dx

Ex

Fx

9x

Ax

Bx

Cx

Table 55. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x x0

NULL

C+@

DLE

C(S)+P

SP

0

@

P

` p x1

SOH

C(S)+A

DC1

C(S)+Q

!

1

A

Q a q x2

STX

C(S)+B

DC2

C(S)+R

"

2

B

R b r x3

ETX

C(S)+C

DC3

C(S)+S

#

3

C

S c s

F12

Cr ↑

°

À

Ð

à

ð

Sh↓

Home

±

Á

á

ñ

Sh↑

End

²

Â

Ò

â

ò

Ins

Pg Up

ƒ

³

Ã

Ó

ã

ó

´

Ä

Ô

ä

ô x4

EOT

C(S)+D

DC4

C(S)+T

$

4

D

T d t

Ent

(keyp)

Pg Dwn

„ x5

ENQ

C(S)+E

NAK

C(S)+U

%

5

E

U e u

F1

µ

Å

Õ

å

õ

X6

ACK

C(S)+F

SYN

C(S)+V

&

6

F

V f v

F2

Æ

Ö

æ

ö

† x7

BEL

C(S)+G

ETB

C(S)+W

'

7

G

W g w x8

BS

CAN

C(S)+X

(

8

H

X h x

F3 F4

·

Ç

×

ç

÷

¸

È

Ø

è

ø

ˆ xA

LF

C(S)+J

SUB

C(S)+Z

*

:

J

Z j z

F6

Ar↑

Š

º

Ê

Ú

ê

ú

HT

TAB x9

EM

C(S)+Y

)

9

I

Y i y

F5

Ar↓

¹

É

Ù

é

ù xC

FF

C(S)+L

FS

C+\

,

<

L l

\

|

F8

Al ↑

Ś

¼

Ì

Ü

ì

ü xB

VT

C(S)+K

ESC

Esc

+

;

K

[ k

{

F7

Al↓

»

Ë

Û

ë

û xD

CR

Enter

GS

C+]

-

=

M

] m

}

F9

Cl ↓

½

Í

Ý

í

ý xF

SI

C(S)+O

US

C(S)+_

/

?

O

_ o

Del

F11

Cr ↓

¿

Ï

ß

ï

ÿ xE

SO

C(S)+N

RS

C+^

.

>

N

^ n

~

F10

Cl ↑

Œ

¾

Î

Þ

î

þ

Extended characters (sky blue) are sent through dedicated keys (when available in the selected country mode) or by using an Alt Mode sequence.

320 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE — cont.

Table 56. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

0x

4x

5x

6x

7x

8x

1x

2x

3x

9x

Ax

Bx

Cx

Dx

Ex

Fx x0

Ar↓ x1

Ar↑

NBSP

°

à

ð

À

Ð

Pg Dwn Home

Space

0

!

1

` p

@

P a q

A

Q

¡

±

Á

á

ñ x2

Al↓ b r

B

R

2

â

ò

Â

Ò

¢

² x3

Al ↑ c s

C

S

#

3

ƒ

ã

ó

Ã

Ó

£

³ x5

Cl ↑

F6

E

U

%

5 e u

å

õ

Å

Õ

¥

µ x4

Cl ↓ d t

D

T

$

4

ä

ô

Ä

Ô

¤

´

F1

X6

Cr ↓

F

V

&

6 f v

æ

ö

Æ

Ö

¦

F2 x7

Cr ↑

§

G

W

7 g w

·

ç

÷

Ç

× x8

BS

F3

H

X

(

8 h x

ˆ

è

ø

È

Ø

¸

¨

˜ xA

F5

J

Z

*

: j z

Š

ê

ú

Ê

Ú

š

º

ª x9

Tab

F4

I

Y

)

9 i y

é

ù

É

Ù

©

¹

ë

û

Ë

Û

«

» xB

S+ Tab

ESC xC

Enter

Keypd

F7

K

[

+

; k

{ | l

L

\

,

<

‹ Ś

ì

ü

Ì

Ü

œ

¬

¼ xE

Ins

F9

N

^

.

> n

~

Œ

î

þ

Î

Þ ž

®

¾

F8 xD

Enter

-

½

í

ý

Í

Ý

M

]

-

= m

} xF

Pg Up

F10

O

_

/

?

o

Del

ï

ÿ

Ï

ß

Ÿ

¯

¿

321 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode

Table 57. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x

8x

Cx

Dx

Ex

Fx

9x

Ax

Bx

1x

5x

6x

7x

2x

3x

4x x0

Alt+000 x1

Alt+001 x2

Alt+002 x3

Alt+003 x4

Alt+004 x5

Alt+005

X6

Alt+006 x7

Alt+007 x8

BS x9

HT

TAB xA

Alt+010 xB

Alt+011 xC

Alt+012 xD

CR

Enter xE

Alt+014

Xf

Alt+015

Alt+016

A+032

A+048

A+064

A+080

A+096

A+112

Alt+017

A+033

A+049

A+065

A+081

A+097

A+113

Sh↓

Alt+018

A+034

A+050

A+066

A+082

A+098

A+114

Sh↑

Alt+019

A+035

A+051

A+067

A+083

A+099

A+115

Ins

Alt+020

A+036

A+052

A+068

A+084

A+100

A+116

Ent

(keyp)

Alt+021

A+037

A+053

A+069

A+085

A+101

A+117

F1

Alt+022

A+038

A+054

A+070

A+086

A+102

A+118

F2

Alt+023

A+039

A+055

A+071

A+087

A+103

A+119

F3

Alt+024

A+040

A+056

A+072

A+088

A+104

A+120

F4

Alt+025

A+041

A+057

A+073

A+089

A+105

A+121

F5

Alt+026

A+042

A+058

A+074

A+090

A+106

A+122

F6

ESC

Esc

A+043

A+059

A+075

A+091

A+107

A+123

F7

Alt+028

A+044

A+060

A+076

A+092

A+108

A+124

F8

Alt+029

A+045

A+061

A+077

A+093

A+109

A+125

F9

Alt+030

A+046

A+062

A+078

A+094

A+110

A+126

F10

Alt+031

A+047

A+063

A+079

A+095

A+111

A+127

F11

F12

Cr ↑

Home End Pg Up Pg Dwn     Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓

A+0161 A+0162 A+0163 A+0164 A+0165 A+0166 A+0167 A+0168 A+0169 A+0170 A+0171 A+0172 A+0173 A+0174 A+0175

A+0176 A+0177 A+0178 A+0179 A+0180 A+0181 A+0182 A+0183 A+0184 A+0185 A+0186 A+0187 A+0188 A+0189 A+0190 A+0191

A+0192 A+0193 A+0194 A+0195 A+0196 A+0197 A+0198 A+0199 A+0200 A+0201 A+0202 A+0203 A+0204 A+0205 A+0206 A+0207

A+0208 A+0209 A+0210 A+0211 A+0212 A+0213 A+0214 A+0215 A+0216 A+0217 A+0218 A+0219 A+0220 A+0221 A+0222 A+0223

A+0224 A+0225 A+0226 A+0227 A+0228 A+0229 A+0230 A+0231 A+0232 A+0233 A+0234 A+0235 A+0236 A+0237 A+0238 A+0239

A+0240 A+0241 A+0242 A+0243 A+0244 A+0245 A+0246 A+0247 A+0248 A+0249 A+0250 A+0251 A+052 A+0253 A+0254 A+0255

Product Reference Guide 322

Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode — cont.

Table 58. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

0x

Cx

Dx

Ex

Fx

8x

9x

Ax

Bx

4x

5x

6x

7x

1x

2x

3x x0

Ar↓ x1

Ar↑

Pg Dwn Home

A+032

A+048

A+033

A+049

A+064

A+080

A+096

A+112

A+065

A+081

A+097

A+113 x2

Al↓



A+034

A+050

A+066

A+082

A+098

A+114 x3

Al ↑



A+035

A+051

A+067

A+083

A+099

A+115 x4

Cl ↓ x5

Cl ↑

 F6

A+036

A+052

A+037

A+053

A+068

A+084

A+100

A+116

A+069

A+085

A+101

A+117

X6

Cr ↓

F1

A+038

A+054

A+070

A+086

A+102

A+118 x7

Cr ↑

F2

A+039

A+055

A+071

A+087

A+103

A+119 x8

BS

F3

A+040

A+056

A+072

A+088

A+104

A+120 x9

Tab

F4

A+041

A+057

A+073

A+089

A+105

A+121 xA

F5

A+042

A+058

A+074

A+090

A+106

A+122 xB

S+ Tab

ESC xC

Enter

Keypd

F7

A+043

A+059

A+044

A+060

A+075

A+091

A+107

A+123

A+076

A+092

A+108

A+124 xD

Enter

F8

A+045

A+061

A+077

A+093

A+109

A+125 xE

Ins

F9

A+046

A+062

A+078

A+094

A+110

A+126 xF

Pg Up

A+0128 A+0129 A+0130 A+0131 A+0132 A+0133 A+0134 A+0135 A+0136 A+0137 A+0138 A+0139 A+0140 A+0141 A+0142 A+0143

A+0144 A+0145 A+0146 A+0147 A+0148 A+0149 A+0150 A+0151 A+0152 A+0153 A+0154 A+0155 A+0156 A+0157 A+0158 A+0159

A+0160 A+0161 A+0162 A+0163 A+0164 A+0165 A+0166 A+0167 A+0168 A+0169 A+0170 A+0171 A+0172 A+0173 A+0174 A+0175

A+0176 A+0177 A+0178 A+0179 A+0180 A+0181 A+0182 A+0183 A+0184 A+0185 A+0186 A+0187 A+0188 A+0189 A+0190 A+0191

A+0192 A+0193 A+0194 A+0195 A+0196 A+0197 A+0198 A+0199 A+0200 A+0201 A+0202 A+0203 A+0204 A+0205 A+0206 A+0207

A+0208 A+0209 A+0210 A+0211 A+0212 A+0213 A+0214 A+0215 A+0216 A+0217 A+0218 A+0219 A+0220 A+0221 A+0222 A+0223

A+0224 A+0225 A+0226 A+0227 A+0228 A+0229 A+0230 A+0231 A+0232 A+0233 A+0234 A+0235 A+0236 A+0237 A+0238 A+0239

A+0240 A+0241 A+0242 A+0243 A+0244 A+0245 A+0246 A+0247 A+0248 A+0249 A+0250 A+0251 A+052 A+0253 A+0254 A+0255

F10

A+047

A+063

A+079

A+095

A+111

A+127

323 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Digital Interface

Table 59. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x

8x

9x

1x

2x

3x

4x

5x

6x

7x

X0

NULL

C+@

DLE

C(S)+P

Space

0

@

P

` p

F12 x1

SOH

C(S)+A

DC1

C(S)+Q

!

1

A

Q a q

Sh↓

F13 x2

STX

C(S)+B

DC2

C(S)+R

2

B

R b r

Sh↑

F14 x3

ETX

C(S)+C

DC3

C(S)+S

#

3

C

S c s

Ins

F15 x4

EOT

C+D

DC4

C(S)+T

$

4

D

T d t

Ent

(keyp)

F16 x5

ENQ

C(S)+E

NAK

C(S)+U

%

5

E

U e u

F1

 x6

ACK

C(S)+F

SYN

C(S)+V

&

6

F

V f v

F2

 x7

BEL

C(S)+G

ETB

C(S)+W

7

G

W g w x8

BS

CAN

C(S)+X

(

8

H

X h x

F3 F4

 

HT

TAB x9

EM

C(S)+Y

)

9

I

Y i y

F5 xA

LF

C(S)+J

SUB

C(S)+Z

*

:

J

Z j z

F6 xB

VT

C(S)+K

ESC

Esc

+

;

K

[ k

{

F7 xC

FF

C(S)+L

FS

C(S)+\

,

<

L l

\

|

F8 xD

CR

Enter

GS

C+]

-

=

M

] m

}

F9

Cl ↓ xE

SO

C(S)+N

RS

C(S)+^

.

>

N

^ n

~

F10

Cl ↑ xF

SI

C(S)+O

US

C(S)+_

/

?

O

_ o

Del

F11

Table 60. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

X0 x1 x2 x3

0x

5x

6x

7x

1x

2x

3x

4x

Space

0

@

P

` p

Q a q

!

1

A

R b r



2

B

S c s



#

3

C x4

Cl ↓ x5

Cl ↑

T d t

 F6

$ %

4

D

5

E

U e u x6

F1

V f v

&

6

F x7

F2

W g w

7

G x8

BS

F3

X h x

(

8

H x9

Tab

F4

Y i y

)

9

I

F5

Z j z

*

:

J xA

à

ESC

+

;

K

[ k

{ xB

S+ Tab xC

Enter

Keypd

F7

, l

\

<

L

| xD

Enter

F8

] m

}

-

=

M

F9

^ n

~

.

>

N xE

Ins xF

F10

/

?

O

_ o

Del

Product Reference Guide 324

IBM31xx 102-key

1x

2x

3x

4x

5x

6x

7x

Table 61. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x

8x

X0

NULL

C+@

DLE

C(S)+P

Space

0

@

P

‘ p x1

SOH

C(S)+A

DC1

C(S)+Q

!

1

A

Q a q

Sh↓ x2

STX

C(S)+B

DC2

C(S)+R

2

B

R

B

R

Sh↑ x3

ETX

C(S)+C

DC3

C(S)+S

#

3

C

S c s

Ins x4

EOT

C+D

DC4

C(S)+T

$

4

D

T d t

Ent

(keyp)

9x F12 Enter Reset Insert Delete x5

ENQ

C(S)+E

NAK

C(S)+U

%

5

E

U e u

F1

Field x6

ACK

C(S)+F

SYN

C(S)+V

&

6

F

V f v

F2

Field + x7

BEL

C(S)+G

ETB

C(S)+W

7

G

W g w x8

BS

CAN

C(S)+X

(

8

H

X h x

F3 F4

Enter paddle

Printl

Ax Cr ↑

HT

TAB x9

EM

C(S)+Y

)

9

I

Y i y

F5 xA

LF

C(S)+J

SUB

C(S)+Z

*

:

J

Z j z

F6

Ar↓ Ar↑ xB

VT

C(S)+K

ESC

Esc

+

;

K

[ k

{

F7 xC

FF

C(S)+L

FS

C(S)+\

,

<

L l

\

|

F8 xD

CR

Enter

GS

C+]

-

=

M

] m

}

F9

Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ xE

SO

C(S)+N

RS

C(S)+^

.

>

N

^ n

F10 xF

SI

C(S)+O

US

C(S)+_

/

?

O

_ o

Del

F11

Cl ↑ Cr ↓

Table 62. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

0x

1x

2x

3x

4x

5x

6x

7x

X0

Ar↓

Pg Dwn

Space

0

@

P

‘ p x1

Ar↑

Home

!

1

A

Q a q x2

Al↓

R

B

R

2

B

“ x3

Al ↑

S c s

3

C

# x4

Cl ↓

T d t

4

D

$ x5

Cl ↑

F6

U e u

%

5

E x6

Cr ↓

F1

V f v

&

6

F x7

Cr ↑

F2

W g w

7

G x8

BS

F3

X h x

(

8

H x9

Tab

F4

Y i y

)

9

I

F5

Z j z

*

:

J xA

 xB

S+ Tab

ESC

+ xC

Enter

Keypd

F7

,

[ k

;

K

{ l

\

<

L

|

F8 xD

Enter

] m

}

-

=

M xE

Ins

F9

.

>

N

^ n xF

Pg Up

F10

/

?

O

_ o

Del

325 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

IBM XT

1x

2x

3x

4x

5x

6x

7x

Table 63. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x

X0

NULL

C+@

DLE

C(S)+P

Space

0

@

P

‘ p x1

SOH

C(S)+A

DC1

C(S)+Q

!

1

A

Q a q x2

STX

C(S)+B

DC2

C(S)+R

2

B

R

B

R x3

ETX

C(S)+C

DC3

C(S)+S

#

3

C

S c s

8x

9x

Ax

F12

Cr ↑

Sh↓

Home

Sh↑

End

Ins

Pg Up x4

EOT

C+D

DC4

C(S)+T

$

4

D

T d t

Ent

(keyp)

Pg Dwn x5

ENQ

C(S)+E

NAK

C(S)+U

%

5

E

U e u

F1

 x6

ACK

C(S)+F

SYN

C(S)+V

&

6

F

V f v

F2

 x7

BEL

C(S)+G

ETB

C(S)+W

7

G

W g w x8

BS

C(S)+H

CAN

C(S)+X

(

8

H

X h x

F3 F4

 

HT

TAB x9

EM

C(S)+Y

)

9

I

Y i y

F5

Ar↓ xA

LF

C(S)+J

SUB

C(S)+Z

*

:

J

Z j z

F6

Ar↑ xB

VT

C(S)+K

ESC

Esc

+

;

K

[ k

{

F7

Al↓ xC

FF

C(S)+L

FS

C(S)+\

,

<

L l

\

|

F8

Al ↑ xD

CR

Enter

GS

C+]

-

=

M

] m

}

F9

Cl ↓ xE

SO

C(S)+N

RS

C(S)+^

.

>

N

^ n

F10

Cl ↑ xF

SI

C(S)+O

US

C(S)+_

/

?

O

_ o

Del

F11

Cr ↓

Table 64. Scancode Set when Control Character 02

0x

X0

Ar↓ x1

Ar↑ x2

Al↓ x3

Al ↑

4x

5x

6x

7x

1x

2x

3x

Pg Dwn

Space

0

‘ p

@

P

Home

!

1 a q

A

Q

B

R

B

R



2 c s

C

S



#

3 x4

Cl ↓ x5

Cl ↑ d t

D

T

 F6

$

4

%

5 e u

E

U x6

Cr ↓

F1

F

V

&

6 f v x7

Cr ↑

F2

G

W

7 g w

F3

H

X

(

8 h x x8

BS x9

Tab

F4

I

Y

)

9 i y

F5

J

Z

*

: j z xA

ESC

+

; k

{

K

[ xB

S+ Tab xC

Enter

Keypd

F7

L

\

,

<

| l

F8 xD

Enter

M

]

-

= m

}

F9

N

^

.

> n xE

Ins xF

Pg Up

F10

O

_

/

?

o

Del

Product Reference Guide 326

Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252

Windows-1252 is a character encoding of the Latin alphabet, used by default in the legacy components of Microsoft Windows in English and some other Western languages.

Product Reference Guide 327

NOTES

328 Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

ASCII Chart

ASCII

Char.

SUB

ESC

FS

GS

RS

US

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

EM

FF

CR

SO

SI

BS

HT

LF

VT

DLE

DC1

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

Hex No.

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

0C

0D

0E

0F

08

09

0A

0B

10

11

04

05

06

07

00

01

02

03

ASCII

Char.

<

=

;

:

>

?

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

/

.

-

,

0

1

*

+

)

(

$

%

&

SP

!

#

Hex No.

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

36

37

38

39

32

33

34

35

2C

2D

2E

2F

28

29

2A

2B

30

31

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

ASCII

Char.

]

\

Z

[

^

_

V

W

X

Y

T

U

R

S

L

M

N

O

J

K

H

I

P

Q

D

E

F

G

@

A

B

C

Hex No.

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

55

4C

4D

4E

4F

48

49

4A

4B

50

51

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

ASCII

Char.

}

| z

{

~

DEL x y v w t u r s n o l m p q k j h i f g d e b c

‘ a

Hex

No.

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

76

77

78

79

72

73

74

75

6C

6D

6E

6F

68

69

6A

6B

70

71

64

65

66

67

60

61

62

63

Australia

Datalogic Scanning Pty Ltd

Telephone: [61] (2) 9870 3200 [email protected]

France and Benelux

Datalogic Scanning SAS

Telephone: [33].01.64.86.71.00

[email protected]

Germany

Datalogic Scanning GmbH

Telephone: 49 (0) 61 51/93 58-0 [email protected]

India

Datalogic Scanning India

Telephone: 91- 22 - 64504739 [email protected]

Italy

Datalogic Scanning SpA

Telephone: [39] (0) 39/62903.1

[email protected]

Japan

Datalogic Scanning KK

Telephone: 81 (0)3 3491 6761 [email protected]

Latin America

Datalogic Scanning, Inc

Telephone: (305) 742-2206 [email protected]

Singapore

Datalogic Scanning Singapore PTE LTD

Telephone: (65) 6435-1311 [email protected]

Iberia

Datalogic Scanning SAS Sucursal en España

Telephone: 34 91 746 28 60 [email protected]

United Kingdom

Datalogic Scanning LTD

Telephone: 44 (0) 1582 791700 [email protected]

© 2010-2011 Datalogic Scanning, Inc.

www.scanning.datalogic.com

Datalogic Scanning, Inc.

959 Terry Street

Eugene, OR 97402

USA

Telephone: (541) 683-5700

Fax: (541) 345-7140

820033714 (Rev. B) Dec-2011

advertisement

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents